JP2020203185A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 1 includes: a performance control microcomputer 91 capable of controlling a predetermined performance; a performance button 63 that a player can depress; a 1000-point point bar movable body 15K capable of traveling from a predetermined standby position to a predetermined operation position; and an image display device 7. The performance control microcomputer 91 can execute a 1000-point point bar challenge using the performance button 63, may allow a 1000-point point bar completed image TB for simulating the 1000-point point bar movable body 15K to be displayed on the image display device 7 on the basis of depression operation of the performance button 63 in the 1000-point point bar challenge, and moves the 1000-point point bar movable body 15K from a predetermined standby position to a predetermined operation position when display of the 1000-point point bar completed image TB is made successful.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 77

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

In a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, as described in Patent Document 1 below, it is determined whether or not the ball is a big hit based on the ball entering the starting port, and based on the result of the determination. , The jackpot game is executed. Further, for example, as described in Patent Document 1 below, many of them are provided with a movable effect movable body (movable body).

JP-A-2005-1770113

However, in recent years, since there are many gaming machines capable of moving a movable body as described in Patent Document 1, it may be uninteresting to simply move the movable body. There was room for improvement in terms of increasing.

The gaming machine of the present invention
An effect control means that can execute a predetermined effect,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A movable body that can move from a predetermined standby position to a predetermined operating position,
With a predetermined display
With
The effect control means
It is possible to execute an operation effect using the operation means.
Based on the operation of the operation means in the operation effect, the display unit may succeed in displaying the image of the movable body imitating the movable body.
When the display of the movable body image is successful, the movable body is moved from the standby position to the operating position.
It is a game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view which shows in detail the 2nd prize winning apparatus and the like provided in the game machine. It is an enlarged view of the part A shown in FIG. 1, and is the figure which shows the indicators provided in the game machine. It is a figure which shows the VV lamp provided in the game machine. It is a figure which shows the periphery of the lower right board lamp provided in the game machine. (A) is a diagram when the 1000-point bar right movable body and the 1000-point bar left movable body are in the standby state, and (b) is the first operation of the 1000-point bar right movable body and the 1000-point bar left movable body. It is a figure at the time of a position, and (c) is a figure at the time of the 2nd operation position of a 1000-point bar right movable body and a 1000-point bar left movable body. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of the game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the sub-control board side of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a hit type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. Special figure 1 It is a fluctuation pattern determination table. Special figure 2 is a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an open pattern determination table of the electric chew. This is a specific table of start winning commands. This is a specific table of start winning commands. This is a variable effect pattern selection table. This is a variable effect pattern selection table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a gate passing process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the distribution member control process. It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a drive control process. It is a flowchart of a thousand-point bar movable body drive control process. It is a flowchart of a thousand-point bar movable body drive control process. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a start winning command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the variation production end processing. It is a flowchart of a special game production selection process. It is a flowchart of an ending effect selection process. It is a flowchart of electric chew driving effect processing. It is a flowchart of V display effect control processing. It is a flowchart of V icon display start processing. It is a flowchart of V icon display end processing. It is a timing chart which shows the opening pattern of the 2nd big winning opening and the operation pattern of the distribution member according to the type of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the V driving effect image. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state in the game machine which concerns on embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability in the game machine, and is the figure for demonstrating the case where the continuous chan ends. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability in the game machine, and is the figure for demonstrating the case where the continuous chan continues. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of a small hit production. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a non-time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a non-time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a non-time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a non-time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a non-time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect in a non-time saving state. This is a timing chart for explaining the 1000-point bar challenge and the 1000-point bar combination production performed in the variable production. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect at the time of performing a 1000-point bar challenge in a non-time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect at the time of performing a 1000-point bar challenge in a non-time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect at the time of performing a 1000-point bar challenge in a non-time saving state.

1. 1. Structure of Game Machine A pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment (the present embodiment) of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the left-right direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described so as to coincide with the left-right direction for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50. The front frame 51 of the game machine frame 50 has a handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a rotation angle, a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 for storing the game ball, and a hitting ball supply plate 61. A surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the space is provided. Further, the front frame 51 is provided with an effect button 63 that can be operated by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67.

On the game board 2, a game area 3 into which a game ball launched by operating the handle 60 flows down is formed by being surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a plurality of decorative board lamps 5 (see FIG. 8). A VV lamp 68 is provided on the upper part of the game board 2, and a lower right board lamp 69 is provided on the lower right part of the game board 2. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails (not shown) for guiding the game ball are projected.

Further, an image display device (effect means) 7 which is a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. On the display screen 7a (display screen) of the image display device 7 (predetermined display unit), an effect symbol (decorative symbol) 8L synchronized with the variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later, There is an effect symbol display area for variable display of 8C and 8R. The effect symbol display area includes, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. Each of the production symbols consists of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, by combining the left, middle, and right effect symbols. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the result of the jackpot lottery) is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

For example, if a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If a small hit is won, the production symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance such as "135". In addition, if it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally does not grasp the result of the jackpot lottery by the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but by the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol, for example, there is a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction. In addition, it is possible to arbitrarily change what kind of effect symbol combination is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result, and the effect symbols may be stopped and displayed at different points when the small hit is won.

The image display device 7 is parallel to the jackpot game (second special game) in addition to the effect symbol variation effect (also referred to as "effect symbol variable display effect" or simply "variation effect") using the effect symbol as described above. The jackpot effect to be performed and the demonstration effect for waiting for customers are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the effect symbol variable display effect, in addition to the effect symbols such as numbers, the effect images other than the effect symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first effect hold display area for displaying the effect hold 9A according to the storage number of the first special figure hold described later and the storage number of the second special figure hold described later are displayed. There is a second effect hold display area for displaying the effect hold 9B accordingly. Due to the display of the effect hold, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 3) and the second display on the second special figure hold indicator 43b, which will be described later. It is possible to show the player the number of stored special figures in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A stage portion 11 that can guide a game ball that rolls on the upper surface to the first starting port 20, which will be described later, is formed in the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. Further, on the left portion of the center decoration body 10, a warp portion 12 is provided so that the game ball flows in from the entrance and the game ball flows out from the exit to the stage portion 11. Further, a decorative member 13 is arranged above the center decorative body 10. Further, the center decorative body 10 is equipped with a board movable device 15 provided with a 1000-point bar movable body (movable body) 15K that can move along the display screen 7a on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Has been done.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is a fixed winning device 19 provided with a first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first entering ball opening) 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery, that is, acquisition and determination of a big hit random number or the like).

Further, on the upper right side of the first starting port 20, a normal variable winning device (so-called electric chew, variable ball entering means) 22 having a second starting port (second starting winning opening, second ball entering port) 21 is provided. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery, that is, acquisition and determination of a big hit random number or the like). It should be noted that the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 corresponds to the "predetermined condition". Further, the second starting port 21 corresponds to the "ball entry port".

The electric chew 22 includes a movable member (ball entry opening / closing member) 23 that can move forward and backward, and opens / closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (see FIG. 7). The second starting port 21 is capable of entering a game ball only when the movable member 23 is open (that is, when the movable member 23 is in the open state). That is, when the movable member 23 is closed (that is, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state), the game ball cannot enter the ball. If the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is closed than when the movable member 23 is open, the second starting port 21 is completely unable to enter the ball when the movable member 23 is closed. It does not have to be possible.

Further, below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, a first large winning device (first special variable winning device, other special winning means) having a first large winning opening (another special winning opening) 30 is provided. ) 31 is provided. The first special winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member (another special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that takes an open state and a closed state, and opens / closes the first special winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 7). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 only when the opening / closing member 32 is open (that is, when it is in the open state).

Further, on the right side of the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, the second large winning device (second special variable winning device, special winning means) 36 provided with the second large winning opening (special winning opening) 35. Is provided. The second special winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (special winning opening opening / closing member) 37 that takes an open state and a closed state, and opens and closes the second special winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is of an advancing / retreating type that advances / retreats back and forth, and is driven by a second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 7). A game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 only when the opening / closing member 37 is open (that is, when it is in the open state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, inside the second special winning device 36, a specific area (V area) 39 and a non-specific area 70 through which the game ball passing through the second special winning opening 35 can pass. Is formed. In the second large winning device 36, a second large winning opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning of a game ball into the second large winning opening 35 is arranged upstream of the specific area 39 and the non-specific area 70. .. Further, in the specific area 39, a specific area sensor 39a for detecting the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 is arranged. Further, in the non-specific area 70, a non-specific area sensor 70a for detecting the passage of a game ball through the non-specific area 70 is arranged.

The second prize-winning device 36 includes a distribution member 71 that distributes a game ball that has passed through the second prize-winning opening 35 to either a specific area 39 or a non-specific area 70, and a distribution member solenoid that drives the distribution member 71. It is equipped with 73. The distribution member 71 takes a first state (passage allowed state) of distributing the game ball to the specific area 39 when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized, and the game ball is released when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized. It takes a second state (passage blocking state) of allocating to the non-specific area 70.

As shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 2, the distribution member 71 is in a passage allowable state that allows the game ball to pass through the specific region 39 when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized. When the distribution member 71 is in the passable state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the specific area 39 after passing through the second special winning opening sensor 35a. The route of this game ball is called the first route.

Further, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 2, the distribution member 71 is in a passage blocking state that prevents the game ball from passing through the specific region 39 when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the distribution member 71 is in the passage blocking state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the second large winning opening sensor 35a and then rolls on the distribution member 71 to a non-specific area. Pass through 70. The route of this game ball is called the second route.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39 is an opportunity to execute the jackpot game (second special game) described later. That is, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery is performed depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39. The jackpot won by the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol described above is called a one-kind jackpot, and the jackpot won by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 is called a two-kind jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a gate 28 through which a game ball can pass is provided above the second starting port 21 in the game area 3. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity to execute a normal symbol lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (winning random number)) for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.

Further, a normal winning opening 27 is provided in the lower left portion of the game area 3. Further, at the lowermost portion of the game area 3, an out port 9 is provided to discharge a game ball that has been driven into the game area 3 but has not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 3.

In the game area 3 in which various winning openings and the like are arranged, the left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and the right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side are arranged. There is. A method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called a left-handed hit. On the other hand, a method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called right-handed hit. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing left-handed is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing right-handed is called the first flow path R1. , The second flow path R2.

A first starting port 20, a first winning device 31, and an out port 9 are provided on the first flow path R1. The player aims to win a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1.

On the other hand, a gate 28, an electric chew 22, a second big prize device 36, a first big prize device 31, and an out port 9 are provided on the second flow path R2. By driving the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2, the player passes through the gate 28, the second starting port 21 related to the electric chew 22, the first large winning opening 30, or the second large winning opening. Aim to win a prize in 35.

In this embodiment, the gate 28, the electric chew 22, and the second prize-winning device 36 are unitized, and can be attached to and detached from the game board 2 as one structure. Further, the fixed winning device 19 and the first large winning device 31 are unitized and can be attached to and detached from the game board 2 as one structure.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, indicators 40 are arranged in the lower right portion of the game board 2. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol display 41a that variably displays the first special symbol, a second special symbol display 41b that variably displays the second special symbol, and a normal symbol display that variably displays the normal symbol. A vessel 42 is included. Further, in the indicators 40, the operation hold of the first special symbol display 43a and the second special symbol display 41b for displaying the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol hold) is displayed. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items (second special figure hold), and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. It has been.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display 41. Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding indicator 43.

In the special symbol display 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped, so that a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (special symbol lottery, The result of the jackpot lottery) will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot will be opened with an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol displayed as stopped (that is, the type of jackpot won). A jackpot game (second special game) that opens 30 is performed. In addition, when the stop symbol is a special symbol (small hit symbol) in a predetermined small hit stop mode, the opening pattern is set according to the type of the small hit symbol displayed as stopped (that is, the type of the winning small hit). A small hit game (first special game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

Specifically, the special symbol display 41 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left 1, 2, The jackpot symbol with the 5th and 6th LEDs lit is displayed. In addition, when a small hit (one of the multiple types of small hits described later) is won, the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left light up, such as "●●●● ○○ ●●". Display the small hit symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the variation display mode is, for example, so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode is that the LED is turned on. The variable display mode may be any mode such that all the LEDs blink at the same time unless each LED is a stop display (lighting display in a specific mode).

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the winning are special. It is temporarily stored in the holding storage unit 85 (see FIG. 7). Specifically, if a prize is won in the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage unit (first numerical information storage means) 85a as the first special figure holding, and when the second starting port 21 is won. If there is, it is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit (second numerical information storage means) 85b as the second special figure holding. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and in this embodiment, the upper limit storage number of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is 4 (first upper limit number). 2 The upper limit storage number of the special figure reservation storage unit 85b is 1 (second upper limit number).

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. The digestion of the special figure hold means that the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold is determined, and the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if there is a prize during the execution of a medium or special game (big hit game or small hit game), the right to the big hit lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. ..

Then, the number of such special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. Specifically, the first special figure holding indicator 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure holding indicator 43b is composed of, for example, one LED. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), the second start port 21 is opened with an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Auxiliary games are played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, the ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of, for example, two LEDs (see FIG. 3), and displays an ordinary symbol according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display (variable display) of the normal symbol is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, that both LEDs are turned on alternately. The variable display mode may be any mode such that all the LEDs blink at the same time unless each LED is a stop display (lighting display in a specific mode).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) acquired for the passage is normally sent to the normal symbol holding storage unit 86 (see FIG. 7). It is temporarily stored as a figure hold. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four.

The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage up to the predetermined number.

Then, the number of such a normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the VV lamp 68 has a left V lamp (first light emitting region) 68a on the left side, a right V lamp (second light emitting region) 68b on the right side, and a lower side. It has a lower character lamp 68c. The left V lamp 68a and the right V lamp 68b can each emit light in a V shape, and it can be suggested that the jackpot game can be executed as described later. Further, the left V lamp 68a and the right V lamp 68b form the letter W by arranging them in the left-right direction, and by emitting light together, it suggests a situation in which two jackpot games can be executed. .. The lower character lamp 68c is a character (DoubleLooP) meaning the game characteristics (features of specifications) of the game machine 1, and can emit light with that character.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the lower right lamp (light emitting means) 69 can emit light in a W shape and is arranged immediately below the electric chew 22. That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the electric chew 22 and the lower right board lamp 69 are both arranged in the right game area 3B, and the lower right board lamp 69 can emit light near the electric chew 22. There is. Note that FIG. 5 shows a state in which the lower right lamp 69 is not emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 1, the 1000-point bar movable body 15K includes a 1000-point bar right movable body 15R (partially movable body) and a 1000-point bar left movable body 15L (partially movable body) (FIG. 1). 6). Further, the design of the right part of the 1000-point bar is applied to the front surface side (front side) of the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R. The design of the left part of the 1000-point bar is applied to the front surface side (front side) of the left movable body 15L of the 1000-point bar.

The thousand-point bar right movable body 15R is attached so as to be hidden behind (behind) the upper part of the game board 2. Then, the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R displays the image display device 7 from the standby position (origin position, predetermined standby position) shown in FIG. 6A on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. While following the screen 7a, it moves linearly downward and is driven to the first operating position shown in FIG. 6B, which is on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Next, when the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R reaches the first operating position shown in FIG. 6B on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R itself is moved. While rotating clockwise, the image display device 7 moves downward from the first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image is moved in an arc in a clockwise direction, and is driven to the second operating position (predetermined operating position) shown in FIG. 6 (c) on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In the present embodiment, the second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) is shown in FIG. 6 (c) while drawing an arc clockwise from the first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) along the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The 1000-point bar right movable body 15R that is moved to the operating position makes it possible to visually entertain the player. Further, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R is linearly moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) to the first operating position shown in FIG. 6 (b), and the first operating position shown in FIG. 6 (b). It is possible to entertain the player by giving a change such as moving from to the second motion position shown in FIG. 6 (c) in a curved line.

Further, the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R of the present embodiment can be moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 6A to the second operating position shown in FIG. 6C by a series of operations. .. The series of operations (series of operations) of the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R referred to here is the standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) ⇒ the second operation shown in FIG. 6 (b) without being completely stopped. 1 Operation position ⇒ This refers to the constant operation of the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R that is moved in the order of the second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c).

Further, the left movable body 15L of the 1000-point bar is attached to the rear (behind) of the lower part of the game board 2. Then, the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L is located on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the standby position (origin position) shown in FIG. 6A along the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , It moves linearly upward and is driven to the first operating position shown in FIG. 6B, which is on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Next, when the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L reaches the first operation position shown in FIG. 6B on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L itself is moved. While rotating clockwise, the image display device 7 moves upward from the first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image is moved clockwise in an arc, and is driven to the second operating position shown in FIG. 6 (c) on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In the present embodiment, the first operation position shown in FIG. 6B is shown in FIG. 6C while drawing an arc clockwise from the first operating position shown in FIG. 6B along the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player can be visually entertained by the left movable body 15L of the 1000-point bar that is moved to the two movement positions. Further, the left movable body 15L of the 1000-point bar is linearly moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) to the first operating position shown in FIG. 6 (b), and the first operating position shown in FIG. 6 (b). It is possible to entertain the player by giving a change such as moving from to the second motion position shown in FIG. 6 (c) in a curved line.

Further, the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L of the present embodiment can be moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 6A to the second operating position shown in FIG. 6C by a series of operations. .. The series of operations (series of operations) of the left movable body 15L of the 1000-point bar referred to here is the standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) ⇒ the second operation shown in FIG. 6 (b) without being completely stopped. 1 operation position ⇒ Refers to the constant operation of the left movable body 15L of the 1000-point bar that is moved in the order of the second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c).

In the present embodiment, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L can be driven in conjunction with each other (at the same timing). As a result, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L constituting the 1000-point bar movable body 15K of the present embodiment are interlocked with each other from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6A. , The thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L are not completely stopped, but pass through the respective first operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (b), and are shown in FIG. 6 (c). ), It is possible to move to each second operation position. Therefore, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are interlocked with each other from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a) to the second operation positions shown in FIG. 6 (c). By moving in a series of movements, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player.

As shown in FIG. 6C, when the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are in the second operating positions, respectively, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L The completed state of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is formed in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 by approaching and with almost no gap. As a result, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R representing the right side of the 1000-point bar and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L representing the left side of the 1000-point bar are the second operating positions, respectively, as shown in FIG. 6 (c). A thousand-point bar is formed in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Therefore, by showing the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L together from the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it looks like a 1000-point bar.

In the present embodiment, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are interlocked and moved to the second movement positions shown in FIG. 6C in a series of movements to obtain an image. Visually entertain until the completed state of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is formed in front of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and see the completed state of the formed 1000-point bar movable body 15K. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relates to a main control board (game control board) 80 that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and an effect to be executed as the game progresses. It includes a sub control board (effect control board) 90 for controlling, a payout control board 110 for controlling payout of game balls, and the like. The main control board 80 constitutes a main control unit, and the sub control board 90 constitutes a sub control unit together with an image control board 100, a lamp control board 107, and a voice control board 106, which will be described later. The sub control unit may include at least the sub control board 90.

A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 (game control means) includes a ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the ROM 83. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM 83 may be externally attached. The RAM 84 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 85 (first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b) and a normal figure reservation storage unit 86.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and non-specific. The area sensor 70a and the normal winning opening sensor 27a are connected.

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. The non-specific area sensor 70a is provided in the non-specific area 70 in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided in each ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the electric chew solenoid 24, the first special winning opening solenoid 33, the second special winning opening solenoid 38, and the distribution member solenoid 73 are connected. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The distribution member solenoid 73 drives the distribution member 71 of the second special winning device 36.

Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a general. Figure Hold indicator 44 is connected. That is, the display control of these indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. On the payout control board 110, a prize ball payout device 120, a ball rental payout device 130, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and capable of lending balls based on information such as an inserted prepaid card). The launcher 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1. The ball rental motor 131 of the ball rental device 130 is driven to pay out the ball rental. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. Further, the ball lending sensor to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 112, the touch switch 114 detects contact with the handle 60, and the firing volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, one gaming ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

As shown in FIG. 8, a production control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 91 that controls the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 (effect control means) includes a ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 92 that executes a program stored in the ROM 93. It is included. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 97. The input / output circuit 97 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM 93 may be externally attached.

The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 causes the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The RAM 104 of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM 103 of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), background images, etc. Image data of is stored. The CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the lower right board lamp 69, and the VV lamp 68 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. I do. In detail, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and the frame lamp 66 and the panel according to the light emission pattern data. It controls the light emission of lamps such as the lamp 5, the lower right lamp 69, and the VV lamp 68. The data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is a thousand-point bar right drive motor 15Rm which is a drive source of the panel movable device 15 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. To drive. As a result, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R is moved downward from the standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) to the first operating position shown in FIG. 6 (b), and the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R is moved clockwise. While performing the rotation operation, the first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) is moved downward to the second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) in a clockwise arc. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is a thousand-point bar left drive motor which is a drive source of the panel movable device 15 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Drive 15 Lm. As a result, the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L is moved upward from the standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) to the first operating position shown in FIG. 6 (b), and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L is moved clockwise. While performing the rotation operation, the first operation position shown in FIG. 6B is moved upward in an arc clockwise from the second operation position shown in FIG. 6C. In detail, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (also referred to as drive data) that determines the operation mode of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K (1000-point bar right movable body 15R, 1000-point bar left movable body 15L). , The operation of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K (1000-point bar right movable body 15R, 1000-point bar left movable body 15L) is controlled according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107. In that case, the lighting control of the lamp and the thousand-point bar movable body 15K (thousand-point bar right movable body 15R, thousand-point bar left movable body 15L) may be mounted on the CPU. The operation control may be executed. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, the effect button detection SW (switch) 63a for detecting that the effect button 63 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed is connected to the sub control board 90. Therefore, when the effect button 63 is pressed, a signal is output from the effect button detection SW63a to the sub control board 90.

3. 3. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, there are "big hits", "small hits", and "missing" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In detail, the results of the lottery for the first special symbol include "big hit", "small hit", and "missing", and the results of the lottery for the second special symbol include "big hit" and "small hit". is there. That is, the lottery for the second special symbol will not result in "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When it is "off", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41.

If you win a big hit in the special symbol lottery, the first big winning opening 30 will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of big hit) displayed as a stop "Big hit game (equivalent to the second special game) Is executed. If you win a small hit, a "small hit game (corresponding to the first special game)" that opens the second big winning opening 35 with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of small hit) displayed as stopped Will be executed. Then, when the game ball enters the specific area 39 in the second big winning opening 35 during the execution of the small hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the winning small hit. The "big hit game" (second special game) is executed. The jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot winning is referred to as a type 1 jackpot game. Further, the jackpot game executed based on the passage to the specific area 39 is referred to as a type 2 jackpot game.

In this form, the jackpot game consists of multiple round games (unit open game), an opening before the first round game is started (also referred to as OP), and an ending after the final round game is completed. (Also referred to as ED) and is included. Each round game begins with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit opening game is the small hit opening game that opens the second large winning opening 35, the opening before the small hit opening game is started (interval before opening), and the small hit opening game is completed. Includes later ending (interval after closure).

As a result of the special symbol lottery, when the jackpot is won (that is, when the first jackpot is won), the jackpot game (class 1 jackpot game) that opens the first jackpot 30 is executed. More specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, there are "9R (round) normal jackpot", "4R time saving jackpot", and "9R time saving jackpot" as the types of jackpots. The "9R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the gaming state to the "non-time saving state and low base state" described later after opening the first big winning opening 30 over 9R. The "4R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the gaming state to the "time saving state and high base state" described later after opening the first big winning opening 30 over 4R. The "9R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the gaming state to the "time saving state and high base state" described later after opening the first big winning opening 30 over 9R. In each of the big hits, the number of times the first big winning opening 30 is opened per 1R is one, and the maximum opening time is 29.5 seconds.

In addition, "9R normal jackpot" and "4R time saving jackpot" may be won only by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). On the other hand, there is a possibility that the "9R time saving jackpot" will be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). When the "9R normal jackpot" is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the "special symbol 1_normal symbol" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a. Further, when the "4R time saving jackpot" is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, "special figure 1_time saving symbol 1" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a. In addition, when the "9R time saving jackpot" is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, "special figure 2_time saving symbol 2" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b.

On the other hand, as a result of the special symbol lottery, if a small hit is won, a small hit game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened once is executed. When a game ball wins a prize in the second big winning opening 35 opened by the small hit game and the game ball passes through a specific area 39 in the second big winning device 36, the big hit is won, and continuously over 9R. A jackpot game (two types of jackpot games) that opens the first big winning opening 30 is executed. When the two types of big hit games are executed, the opening of the second big winning opening 35 as the small hit game corresponds to the first round. Therefore, the total number of rounds at this time is 10R. In addition, a big hit game and a small hit game may be called a special game. Further, in the special game, there may be a round in which the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times in one round.

More specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the types of small hits are "10R time saving small hit A", "10R time saving small hit B", "10R time saving small hit C", and "10R normal small hit". There is. For each type of small hit, a small hit game is performed, and if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the small hit game, a big hit game (two types of big hit game) is performed. In the small hit game, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39, the big hit game is not executed. The “10R time saving small hit A” is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through the specific area 39 (also referred to as V passage). On the other hand, "10R time saving small hit B", "10R time saving small hit C", and "10R normal small hit" are small hits that can pass V without fail if the game is played by right-handed. .. Whether or not V can pass during the execution of the small hit game is determined by the operation pattern of the distribution member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 37. This point will be described in detail later.

In each type of small hit game, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once for 1.6 seconds. However, the opening time in each small hit game differs depending on the type of small hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the time saving small hit A is about 4.6 seconds, the time saving small hit B is 21 seconds, and the time saving small hit C and the normal small hit are 0.008 seconds. The reason why the opening time of the small hit game differs depending on the type of small hit is the opening timing of the second large winning opening 35 for the distribution member 71 that has been moving in a constant motion from the start of this opening. To change. As a result, a passing open pattern that allows V to pass during the execution of the small hit game and a non-passing opening pattern that does not allow V passage (including substantially) during the execution of the small hit game are created. The pass opening pattern corresponds to the first opening pattern. The non-passing open pattern corresponds to the second open pattern. The details of the pass-open pattern and the non-pass-open pattern will be described later.

Further, in the big hit game (type 2 big hit game) executed based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39, the first big winning opening 30 is opened in the opening pattern determined according to the type of the small hit. Specifically, in "10R time reduction small hit A", the game state is described later after the execution of the two-kind big hit game in which the maximum opening time per 1R is set to 29.5 seconds and the first big winning opening 30 is opened over 9R. It is a hit to control to "time saving state and high base state". However, since "10R time saving small hit A" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through V, such a two-kind big hit game is rarely executed.

In addition, "10R time saving small hit B" and "10R time saving small hit C" are set after the execution of the two kinds of big hit games in which the first big winning opening 30 is opened over 9R with the maximum opening time per 1R being 29.5 seconds. This is to control the gaming state to the "time saving state and high base state" described later. In addition, in the "10R normal small hit", the maximum opening time per 1R is set to 29.5 seconds in the 2R to 5R, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened, and the maximum opening time per 1R in the 6th to 10R. After executing the two-kind jackpot game in which the first big winning opening 30 is opened with 0.1 seconds, the game state is controlled to the "non-time saving state and low base state" described later. That is, in this "10R normal small hit", the opening time of the first big winning opening 30 is extremely short from the 6th R to the 10th R, and it is not expected that the first big winning opening 30 will be won. That is, only a total of 4Rs from the 2nd to the 5th Rs are hits of the actual 4Rs in which a prize can be expected to the first large winning opening 30. The number of times the first big winning opening 30 is opened per 1R in the two-kind big hit game is one.

In addition, "10R time saving small hit A" and "10R time saving small hit B" may be won only by the lottery of the first special symbol. On the other hand, "10R time saving small hit C" and "10R normal small hit" may be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. When "10R time saving small hit A" is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, "special figure 1_small hit symbol 1 with time saving" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a. Further, when the "10R time saving small hit symbol B" is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, "special figure 1_small hit symbol 2 with time saving" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a. Further, when the "10R time saving small hit C" is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, "special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 with time saving" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b. Further, when the "10R normal small hit" is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the "special figure 2_short-time small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b.

The probability of distribution to each jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 50% for the 9R normal jackpot and 50% for the 4R time-saving jackpot. On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are all 9R time-saving jackpots. In addition, the distribution probability to each small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 99% for 10R time saving small hit A (small hit that can pass V), and 10R time saving small hit B (small hit that can pass V). Is 1%. In addition, the probability of distribution to each small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 50% for 10R short-time small hit C (time-saving small hit that can pass V), and 10R normal small hit (normal small hit that can pass V). Is 50%. The distribution rate to each big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol and the distribution rate to each small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9 can be changed as appropriate. Further, the distribution rate to each big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9 and the distribution rate to each small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol can be changed as appropriate.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lottery for whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit is performed based on the "big hit random number", and the lottery for the winning type is performed based on the "win type random number". As shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit type random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 include "reach random numbers" and "variable pattern random numbers" in addition to the jackpot random numbers and the hit type random numbers.

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the result of the jackpot determination is incorrect. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed out of a plurality of effect symbols, and a big hit is won depending on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") that is a combination of the effect symbols shown. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is slightly shaken in the display screen 7a. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 127.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage to the gate 28 include ordinary symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) shown in FIG. 10B. The ordinary symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 65535.

4. Description of Game State Next, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol display 42 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 have a fluctuation time shortening function.

The state in which the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol display 41 is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the fluctuation pattern is determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time reduction state (see FIGS. 12 and 13). That is, when the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 is activated, a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol as compared with the case where the special symbol display 41 is not activated. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 operates in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41. That is, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 operates in the time saving state and does not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 11 (E)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 14). That is, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22 is operating.

Under the situation where the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 and the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22 are operating, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently than when these functions are not operating. Then, the game ball frequently wins a prize at the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is referred to as the "high base state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is referred to as the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also called the electric support control state. The low base state is also called the non-electric support control state. The high base state corresponds to the "privilege game state".

In the high base state (the situation where the time saving state is operating), the function for increasing the number of times of opening of the electric chew 22 is not operating (see FIG. 14), but the function for increasing the number of times of opening of the electric chew 22 is activated. You may. That is, in the auxiliary game executed in the high base state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened may be larger than that in the auxiliary game executed in the non-time saving state. Further, in the high base state, the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 may be activated. That is, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery in the low base state may be set relatively low, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery in the high base state may be set relatively high. In this case, it is advisable to set the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery in the low base state to "zero". This is because it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in the low base state. That is, with this configuration, it is possible to prevent an aggressive game aimed at executing a small hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol despite the low base state.

Furthermore, the high base state does not have to activate all the above functions. That is, the operation of one or more of the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22, the opening frequency increasing function of the electric chew 22, and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42. It suffices if the electric chew 22 is opened more easily than when the function is not operating. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, "4R time saving big hit", "9R time saving big hit", "10R time saving small hit A", "10R time saving small hit B", or "10R time saving small hit" The gaming state after the jackpot game executed by winning "C" is a time saving state and a high base state. The time saving state and the high base state are terminated when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (99 times in this embodiment), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

Further, the game state after the big hit game executed by winning the "9R normal big hit" or the "10R normal small hit" is a non-time saving state and a low base state (see FIG. 9). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "normal gaming state". When playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal gaming state.

In the high base state, it is more advantageous to let the game ball enter the right game area 3B (see FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 as compared with the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. .. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is an opportunity for the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is hit right to win the second starting port 21. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (see FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 as compared with the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. Because it has become. Therefore, a left-handed hit is made so that the game ball can be won in the first starting port 20.

5. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 [Main Control Main Processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 37. The counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM 84. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 19 from the ROM 83. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU82 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for interrupt time management) setting, and resetting of various flags, status, counter, etc. And so on. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting (S001) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

Following the initial setting (S001), interrupts are disabled (S002), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003), various random number counter values shown in FIG. 10 are added and updated by 1. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The period initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU 82 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, for example, it is executed in a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next main timer interrupt process (S005), various counters by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003). The value update process is repeatedly executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), in each process described below, commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, first large winning port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. The detection signal detected by the 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 7) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 10 includes the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) and the other periods (main side timer interrupt processing (S005). After the end of), the period until the next main timer interrupt process (S005) is started) is performed.

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the sensor detection process (S104), normal operation process (S105), special operation process (S106), distribution member control process (S107), and specific area sensor, which will be described later. Execute the process (S108). After that, other processing (S109) is executed to end the main timer interrupt processing (S005). As another process (S109), the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number based on the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 described later, or based on the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 described later. The first special figure holding indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number thereof. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82, the processes of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 19), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec), the main control is performed again. The side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed. In the output process (S101) of the main side timer interrupt process (S005) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 in the previous main side timer interrupt process (S005) is output.

[Sensor detection process] As shown in FIG. 21, in the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a ( S201). If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S201), the gate passing process (S202) described later is performed. On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S201), it passes the gate passing process (S202) and proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S203). If the game ball has not won in the second starting port 21 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S209, but if the game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (YES in S203), special figure 2 Judgment whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of the second special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold provided in the RAM 84) has reached one (the second upper limit number). (S204). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached one (YES in S204), the process proceeds to step S209, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than one (that is, when there is none), the process proceeds to step S209. (NO in S204), add 1 to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S205).

Subsequently, the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S206) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S206), the value of the jackpot random number counter (value of label-TRND-A), the value of the hit type random number counter (value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (label). -The value of TRND-RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (the value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random number value group shown in FIG. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 of the special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, the second start winning command specifying process (S207) is performed. In the second start winning command specifying process (S207), the second starting winning command is specified by using the starting winning command specifying table shown in FIG. 16 based on the random number value group stored in step S206. Specifically, the current special figure 2 number of reserved balls is "1" and the current game state is the time saving state, the jackpot random number is "65300", the hit type random number is "1", the reach random number is "1", If the variation pattern random number is "48", the command "F2H1BH" is specified as the second start winning command by referring to the second start opening and the time saving state in the start winning command specifying table of FIG. The command consists of 2 bytes of information (1 byte upper command (for example, F2H) and 1 byte lower command (for example, 1AH)).

The classification of each random number in the table shown in FIG. 16 is based on the respective random number determination tables (big hit determination table in FIG. 10 (A), hit type determination table in FIG. 10 (B), reach determination table in FIG. 10 (C), and so on. Corresponds to the classification in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. Therefore, the identified second start winning command includes information on whether or not a big hit is won, whether or not a small hit is won, the type of special symbol, whether or not there is a reach, and whether or not to perform SP reach.

In the start winning command of this embodiment, the value of the upper digit of the two-digit upper command in hexadecimal is the type of starting port (whether the first starting port 20 is won or the second starting port 21 is won). Information to specify. Further, the value of the lower digit of the upper command is information for designating the game state (whether the time saving state or the non-time saving state). Further, among the lower commands having two digits in hexadecimal, the value in the upper digit is information for designating the number of reserved balls (see the remarks in the margins of FIGS. 15 and 16). In addition, the value of the lower digit of the lower command is information that specifies whether or not the jackpot is correct, whether or not the small hit is correct, the type of special symbol, whether or not there is reach, and whether or not to perform SP reach. The rule for generating such a start winning command is an example and can be changed arbitrarily.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the second start winning command specified in step S207 in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S208).

Subsequently, in the sensor detection process (S104), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S209). This process ends when the game ball has not won in the first starting port 20 (NO in S209), but when the game ball has won in the first starting port 20 (YES in S209), special figure 1 Judgment whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of 1st special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of 1st special figure hold provided in the RAM 84) has reached 4 (the first upper limit number). (S210). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches four (YES in S210), this process ends, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than four (NO in S210), Special figure 1 Add "1" to the number of reserved balls (S212).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S212) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S212), the value of the jackpot random number counter (label-TRND-A value) and the value of the hit type random number counter (label-) are the same as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S206). The TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC value), and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired (that is, the disturbance shown in FIG. 10 (A)). A numerical group is acquired), and the acquired random number values are stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a.

Subsequently, the first start winning command specifying process (S213) is performed. In the first start winning command specifying process (S213), the first starting winning command is specified using the starting winning command specifying table shown in FIG. 15 based on the random number value group stored in step S212. Specifically, the current special figure 1 reserved ball is "1" and the current game state is a non-time saving state, the jackpot random number is "65300", the hit type random number is "50", the reach random number is "1", If the variation pattern random number is "1", the command "E1H13H" is specified as the first start winning command by referring to the first start opening and the non-time saving state in the start winning command specifying table of FIG. The identified first start winning command contains information that specifies whether the jackpot is successful, the small hit is successful, the type of special symbol, the presence or absence of reach, and whether or not to perform SP reach.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the first start winning command specified in step S213 in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S214), and ends the process.

[Gate Passing Process] As shown in FIG. 22, in the gate passing process (S202), the value of the counter that counts the number of normal symbol holding balls (the number of normal symbol holdings, specifically, the number of normal symbol holdings provided in the RAM 84). ) Is 4 or more (S301), and if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S301), the process ends. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S301), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S302), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S303) is performed. In the ordinary symbol random number acquisition process (S303), the ordinary symbol random number counter value (label-TRND-H value, FIG. 10 (B)) is acquired, and the acquired random number value is currently stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit 86 of the RAM 84. It is stored in the storage area according to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

[Normal operation processing] The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal operation processing (S105) shown in FIG. 23 after the sensor detection processing (S104). In the normal operation process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (S401). If the electric chew is not in operation (NO in S401), then it is determined whether or not the stop display of the normal symbol is in progress (S402). If the normal symbol is not displayed as stopped (NO in S402), it is subsequently determined whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S403). Unless the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being displayed (NO in S403), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S404). If the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (YES in S404), this process ends.

If the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is not "0" in step S404 (NO in S404), the collision detection process (S405) is performed. In the hit determination process (S405), the normal symbol random number counter value (value of label-TRND-H) stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit 86 is read out, and the normal symbol hit determination table (hit) shown in FIG. 10 (D) is read. It is determined whether or not the determination value is a hit based on "1" to "65535"). Then, a symbol determination process is performed in which the normal symbol stop symbol data according to the result of the hit determination is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 84 (S406). That is, in the symbol determination process (S406), if it is "missing", the data corresponding to the "normal drawing lost symbol" is set, and if it is "hit", the data corresponding to the "normal winning symbol" is set.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (S407). In the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (S407), referring to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 10 (E), if the game state is a time saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1 second. Select a pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the number of normally symbol reserved balls by 1 (S408). Then, the storage location (storage area) of each normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the storage corresponding to the fourth hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is performed. Clear the area (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S409). In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order in which it was held. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation pattern selected in step S407 (S410). Along with this, in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, a command for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set.

If the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being displayed in step S403 described above (YES in S403), it is subsequently determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S411), and if not, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S411), the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped at the display result (normal hit symbol or normal lost symbol) according to the judgment result of the normal symbol random number (S412). Then, the sub-control board 90 is set with the normal symbol fluctuation stop command for notifying the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol (S413), and the stop time of the normal symbol is set (S414) to end this process.

If the stop display of the normal symbol is being displayed in step S402 described above (YES in S402), then it is determined whether or not the stop time of the normal symbol set in step S414 has elapsed (S415), and the process has elapsed. If not, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S415), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol data of the normal hit symbol is set (S416), and if it is not the data of the normal hit symbol (that is, if it is not a hit). (NO in S416)), this process is completed. On the other hand, if it is the data of the normal hit symbol (that is, if it is a hit (YES in S416)), the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is set (S417). Specifically, if it is in the time saving state, the opening pattern in the time saving state (see the electric chew opening TBL2 in FIG. 14) is set as the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. On the other hand, in the non-time saving state, the opening pattern in the non-time saving state (see the electric chew opening TBL1 in FIG. 14) is set as the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. Then, the electric chew 22 is operated according to the opening pattern set in step S417 (S418).

Further, if the electric chew 22 is operating in step S401 described above (YES in S401), it is subsequently determined whether or not the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed (S419), and if not. Finish the process. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S419), the operation of the electric chew 22 is terminated (S420).

[Special operation processing] The game control microcomputer 81 performs the special operation processing (S106) shown in FIG. 24 after the normal operation processing (S105). In the special operation process (S106), the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the large winning opening device (first large winning device 31 and second large winning device 36) is divided into five stages, and "special operation" is performed in each of these stages. Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 "is assigned. Then, when the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S901), the special symbol standby process (S902) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "2" (NO in S901). , S903), special symbol change processing (S904), and if "special operation status" is "3" (NO for both S901 and S903, YES for S905), special symbol confirmation processing (S906) ), And if the "special operation status" is "4" (NO for S901, S903, S905, YES for S907), perform special electric accessory processing 1 (S908) as a jackpot game, and " When the "special operation status" is "5" (all of S901, S903, S905, and S907 are NO), the special electric accessory processing 2 (S909) as a small hit game is performed. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process] As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol standby process (S902), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) is "0". Is determined (S1001). Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1001), that is, when there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning the second starting port 21, the first starting It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1) is “0” (S1007). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1007), that is, when there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20, it is already It is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is set as the standby screen (demo screen for waiting for customers) (S1013), if so (YES in S1013), the process is completed, and if not (S1013). NO), perform standby screen setting processing (S1014). In the standby screen setting process (S1014), a customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby screen is set after waiting for the elapse of a predetermined waiting time.

When the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is not "0" in step S1001 (NO in S1001), that is, the memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 (holding information in special figure 2). ) Is one or more, the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1003), which will be described later, are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 by 1 (S1004). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the first reservation in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is performed. Clear the storage area corresponding to (S1011). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1006). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1006), the special operation status is set to "2" and the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The fluctuation start command (also referred to as the special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1006) is the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002). Information and fluctuation pattern information (information including fluctuation time information) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1003) are included.

Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1001 and NO in S1007), that is, there is no hold information in Special Figure 2, but the number When there is one or more memories (holding information of special figure 1) of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of 1 starting port 20, the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) and the special figure described later 1 Perform the variation pattern selection process (S1009). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 by 1 (S1010). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the fourth hold in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is performed. Clears the storage area corresponding to (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1011). In this way, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1012). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1012), the special operation status is set to "2" and the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. The fluctuation start command (also referred to as the special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1012) is the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008). Information and fluctuation pattern information (information including fluctuation time information) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1009) are included.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special figure hold is performed only when the second special figure hold is "0" (when YES in S1001). That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. In this embodiment, there is no loss in the lottery based on the second special figure hold, and the small hit is always won except when the big hit is won, and in the small hit game, the specific area 39 can always be passed. It has become. That is, the jackpot game is always executed (winning the jackpot) whenever a lottery based on the second special figure hold is made. This point will be described in detail later.

[Special Figure 2 Big Hit Judgment Process (Special Figure 1 Big Hit Judgment Process)] Special Figure 2 Big Hit Judgment Process (S1002) and Special Figure 1 Big Hit Judgment Process (S1008) are based on FIG. 26 because the processing flow is the same. I will explain them all together. As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) or the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008), first, the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A value) is read out as the determination value (S1101). ). Specifically, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002), the jackpot random number counter value stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM 84 is read out. Further, in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008), the jackpot random number counter value stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a (specifically, the storage area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the RAM 84 is stored. read out.

Next, the jackpot determination table (see FIG. 10A) is set (S1102). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set jackpot determination table (S1103). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A) matches any of the jackpot determination values "65300" to "65535" (see FIG. 10A). If the result of the jackpot determination (S1103) is "big hit", the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1104), and the hit type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS value) is read out and shown in FIG. 10 (B). The jackpot type is determined based on the hit type determination table (S1105). After determining the jackpot type (S1105), the special symbol stop symbol data (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the jackpot type (type of jackpot symbol) is set in the hit type buffer provided in the RAM 84, and the process is completed (S1106). ..

On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination (S1103) is not "big hit", it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1107). Specifically, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002), it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number counter value matches any of the small hit determination values "0" to "65299" (FIG. 10 (A)). (Refer to the column of special figure 2). Further, in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008), it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number counter value matches any of the small hit determination values "0" to "3500" (the special figure of FIG. 10A). See column 1). The probability of winning a small hit is higher in the lottery in Special Figure 2 than in the lottery in Special Figure 1.

If the result of the small hit determination (S1107) is "small hit", the small hit flag is turned ON (S1108), the hit type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS value) is read, and FIG. 10 (B) ) Is used to determine the small hit type (S1109). After determining the small hit type (S1109), the special symbol stop symbol data (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the small hit type (small hit symbol type) is set in the hit type buffer provided in the RAM 84 (S1110). Finish the process. A random number that determines whether or not it is a small hit may be provided separately from the big hit random number.

Also, if it is not a big hit (NO in S1103), it is not a small hit (NO in S1107), it is a "loss", so set the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) according to the lost symbol (S1111), This process is completed. In this embodiment, the result may be "missing" in the lottery of special figure 1, while the small win probability in each lottery is not so that the result is not "missing" in the lottery of special figure 2. Is set (see FIG. 10 (A)).

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Pattern Selection Process (Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Pattern Selection Process)] Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Pattern Selection Process (S1003) and Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Pattern Selection Process (S1009) have the same processing flow. This will be collectively described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1003) or the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1009), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (whether or not the time saving flag is ON). (S1301).

If it is not in the time saving state (NO in S1301), that is, if it is in the non-time saving state, it is subsequently determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1302). If it is ON (YES in S1302), the non-time saving state medium jackpot table (the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern judgment table shown in FIG. 12, and the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern judgment table shown in FIG. 13). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (value of label-TRND-T1) with reference to the portion corresponding to the jackpot (S1303). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided.

Further, in step S1302, if the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1302), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1304). If it is ON (YES in S1304), the non-time saving state small and medium-sized hit table (the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and the small hit in the fluctuation pattern judgment table shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the state and the part corresponding to the small hit (S1305).

Further, in step S1304, if the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1304), it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC value) is the reach establishment random number value (S1306). As shown in FIG. 10 (C), the reach establishment random number values are "0" to "5" in the time saving state and "0" to "13" in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by allowing more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time to be selected in the time saving state. When the reach random number counter value is the reach establishment random number value (YES in S1306), that is, in the case of the loss with reach, the loss table with reach during the non-time reduction state (the non-time reduction state among the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 12). In addition, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value by referring to the portion corresponding to the loss with reach and the portion corresponding to the loss with reach and the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 (the portion corresponding to the loss with reach). S1307).

On the other hand, when the reach random number counter value is not the reach establishment random number value (NO in S1306), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the loss table without reach during the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction among the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 12). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value by referring to the part corresponding to the state and the loss without reach and the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (S1308). At the time of this loss without reach, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" to "2" is selected. It is supposed to be done.

Further, in step S1301, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the time saving state (YES in S1301), as shown in FIG. 28, the reference variation pattern determination table is set to the table in the time saving state (variation pattern shown in FIG. 12). Process (S1309 to S1315) in the same flow as in steps S1302 to S1308 above except that the part corresponding to the time saving state in the judgment table and the part corresponding to the time saving state in the fluctuation pattern judgment table shown in FIG. 13). Do. That is, if the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1309), the time-saving state medium jackpot table (the part corresponding to the time-saving state and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, and the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the time saving state and the part corresponding to the jackpot (S1310).

If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1311), the time-saving state medium-small hit table (the portion of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 corresponding to the time-saving state and small hit, the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the part corresponding to the time saving state and the small hit (S1312). If the reach random number counter value is a reach-established random number value (YES in S1313), the loss table with reach in the time-saving state (the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 corresponding to the loss with time reduction and reach, FIG. 13). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S1314) with reference to the fluctuation pattern judgment table shown in (1), which corresponds to the time saving state and the loss with reach). If the reach random number counter value is not a reach-established random number value (NO in S1313), there is no reach loss table in the time saving state (the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 corresponding to the time saving state and no reach loss, FIG. 13). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in (the part corresponding to the time saving state and the loss without reach) (S1315).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table during the time reduction state (the part corresponding to the time reduction state in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 and the part corresponding to the time reduction state in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13), there is no reach loss. The function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls at the time works when the number of reserved balls is "2" to "4". That is, the shortening variation is more likely to be selected than in the non-time saving state. That is, the fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state is a table in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, as shown in FIG. 27, the selected variation pattern is set (S1316), and this process is completed. The fluctuation pattern information set in step S1316 is included in the fluctuation start command set in step S1006 or S1012 in the special symbol standby process (S902).

[Process during special symbol change] As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol change process (S904), first, the change time of the special symbol (the change time determined according to the change pattern selected in step S1003 or S1009, FIG. 12). , FIG. 13) is determined (S1501). If it has not passed (NO in S1501), this process ends immediately. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1501), the fluctuation stop command is set (S1502), and the special operation status is set to "3" (S1503). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at the symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol or lost symbol) according to the set special symbol stop symbol data (S1504), this Finish the process.

[Special symbol determination process] As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol determination process (S906), first, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (S1601). If it has not passed (NO in S1601), this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1601), the game state management process described later is performed (S1602).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1603). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1603), set the special operation status to "4" (S1604). Then, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1605), and if it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1607. If it is ON, the time saving flag is turned OFF (S1606) and the process proceeds to step S1607. .. As a result, the non-time saving state is controlled during the execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the jackpot game.

After that, in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S1607) and start the jackpot game opening (S1608). Following step S1608, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern (see FIG. 9 for details) according to the type of winning jackpot (S1609). At this time, the value of the big winning opening opening counter that counts the number of times the big winning opening is opened during the special game is set to a value corresponding to the type of winning big hit. It should be noted that the set of open patterns (set of data according to the open pattern) may be performed for each round.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1603 (NO in S1603), it is subsequently determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1610). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1610), the special operation status is set to "5" (S1611). When the small hit flag is ON, it is not turned OFF even if the time saving flag is ON. After that, in order to start the small hit game, the small hit opening command is set (S1612), and the small hit game opening is started (S1613).

Following step S1613, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern (see FIG. 9 for details) according to the type of winning small hit (S1614). At this time, the value of the large winning opening opening counter is set to a value corresponding to the type of winning small hit. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the distribution member operation flag (S1615), and ends this process. The distribution member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is a period for operating the distribution member 71. That is, in this embodiment, the operation of the distribution member 71 is started at the same time as the opening of the small hit game. The operation pattern of the distribution member will be described in detail later.

If the small hit flag is not ON in step S1610 (NO in S1610), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game starts, so the special operation status is set to "1" (S1616) and this process ends.

[Game state management process] As shown in FIG. 31, the game state management process (S1602) first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1701), and if it is ON, the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. The value of the time reduction counter that counts the number of times is decremented by 1 (S1702), and whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0" is determined (S1703). If it is "0", the time saving flag is turned off (S1704). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the value of the time saving counter is set to "99" at the time of transition to the time saving state. This point will be described later. After that, in step S1705, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command including the currently set game state information in the output buffer of the RAM 84, and ends this process.

[Special Electric Accessory Process 1 (Big Hit Game)] The special electric accessory process 1 is a process for executing a jackpot game (second special game) such as a type 1 jackpot game or a type 2 jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric accessory process 1 (S908), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2001). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the first jackpot winning device 31 has been completed in the winning jackpot game.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is determined whether or not the first big winning opening 30 is open (that is, whether or not the first big winning device 31 is open) (S2002). If it is not open (NO in S2002), it is time to open the first big prize opening 30, that is, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the opening of the first big winning opening 30 is started. It is determined whether the time has been reached, or whether the time between the openings has elapsed and the time to start the next opening has been reached (S2003).

If the determination result in step S2003 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2003 is YES, the first large winning opening 30 is opened according to the set opening pattern (S2004).

If the first large winning opening 30 is being opened in step S2002 (YES in S2002), the number of winnings in the first large winning opening 30 in the unit opening game becomes the specified maximum winning number (8 in this embodiment). Determine if it has been reached (S2005). If the specified number of winnings has not been reached (NO in S2005), it is time to close the first big winning opening 30 (that is, the predetermined opening time after opening the first big winning opening 30 (see FIG. 9). ) Has passed or not) is determined (S2006). Then, if the opening time of the first prize opening 30 has not passed (NO in S2006), this process is completed.

On the other hand, when the specified number of winnings has been reached (YES in S2005) or when the opening time of the first large winning opening 30 has elapsed (YES in S2006), that is, either of the two opening end conditions If it is satisfied, the first prize opening 30 is closed (closed) (S2007). Then, the value of the large winning opening opening counter is decremented by 1 (S2008), and it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening counter is "0" (S2009). If it is not "0" (NO in S2009), the process is finished as it is to start the next opening.

On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S2009), the jackpot ending command is set (S2010) and the jackpot ending is started (S2011) in order to end the jackpot game. Then, the jackpot end flag is set and the process ends (S2012).

If the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2001 (YES in S2001), all the opening of the first jackpot 30 in the jackpot game has been completed, so it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending time has passed. If the ending time has not passed (NO in S2013), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2013), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2014) and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2015). Then, after setting the special operation status to "1" (S2016), the game state setting process (S2017) described later is performed to end this process.

[Game state setting process] As shown in FIG. 33, in the game state setting process (S2017), first, the jackpot game executed this time is a time saving hit (that is, "4R time saving big hit", "10R time saving small hit A", "10R time". It is determined whether or not the game is a big hit game executed by winning the "short hit B", "9R short hit", or "10R short hit C") (S2101). If the determination result in step S2101 is YES, the time saving flag is turned ON (S2102), the time saving counter is set to "99" (S2103), and this process is completed. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a time saving state and a high base state (privilege game state). This award game state ends when either the condition that the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner 99 times or the next big hit is won is satisfied. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game executed this time is a normal hit (that is, "9R normal jackpot" or 10R normal small hit, see FIG. 9), that is, if the determination result in step S2101 is NO. This process is completed without performing steps S2102 and S2103.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)] The special electric accessory processing 2 is for executing a small hit game (first special game) that opens the second large winning device 36 provided with the specific area 39. It is a process. As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, in the special electric accessory process 2 (S909), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning device 36 is completed in the small hit game.

If the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the second large winning opening 35 is open (that is, whether or not the second large winning device 36 is open) (S2302). If it is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the 2nd big prize opening 35, that is, the time of the predetermined pre-opening interval (opening of the small hit) has passed and the 2nd big winning opening It is determined whether or not it is time to start opening 35 (S2303).

If the determination result in step S2303 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2303 is YES, the second large winning opening 35 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 9) according to the type of winning small hit (S2304).

If the second major winning opening 35 is open in step S2302 (YES in S2302), whether or not the number of winnings in the second major winning opening 35 has reached the specified maximum winning number (8 in this embodiment). Is determined (S2305). If the specified number of winnings has not been reached (NO in S2305), it is time to close the second major winning opening 35 (that is, the predetermined opening time after opening the second major winning opening 35 (Fig. 9). As shown, whether or not 1.6 seconds) has elapsed in this embodiment) is determined (S2306). Then, if the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 has not elapsed (NO in S2306), this process is completed.

On the other hand, when the specified number of winnings has been reached (YES in S2305) or when the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 has elapsed (YES in S2306), that is, either of the two opening end conditions If it is satisfied, the second prize opening 35 is closed (closed) (S2307). Then, the value of the large winning opening opening counter is decremented by 1 (S2308), the small hit end flag is set (S2309), and this process is completed.

If the small hit end flag is ON in step S2301 (YES in S2301), as shown in FIG. 34, the predetermined time after the closing of the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game (time of the interval after closing) is It is determined whether or not the elapse has passed (S2310), and if the time of the interval after closing has not elapsed (NO in S2310), the process ends. The time of the interval after closing the small hit game will be described later. On the other hand, if the interval time has elapsed after closing (YES in S2310), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2311), the small hit flag is turned off (S2312), and the process proceeds to step S2313.

In step S2313, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON. The V flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 during the execution of the small hit game, and is a flag that is turned on in step S2603 (see FIG. 37) described later. If this V flag is not ON (NO in S2313), the 2nd kind jackpot game will not be executed, so the value of the big winning opening opening counter is cleared to "0" (S2314) and the special operation status is set to "1". Set (S2315) to finish the process.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON (YES in S2313), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the V flag (S2317) and turns on the jackpot flag (S2318) in order to execute the two-kind jackpot game. , Set the special operation status to "4" (S2319). Then, if the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2320), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2321). Then, the jackpot opening command is set (S2322) and the jackpot opening is started (S2323). As a result, the small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a short time is shifted to the two-kind big hit game.

[Distribution member control process] The game control microcomputer 81 performs a distribution member control process (S107) after the special operation process (S106) (see FIG. 20). In the distribution member control process (S107), as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether or not the distribution member operation flag is ON (S2501). If the distribution member operation flag is not ON, this process ends. On the other hand, if the distribution member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small hit game has started (see FIG. 30), so the distribution member operation process (see FIG. 30) for operating the distribution member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern ( S2502) is performed, and the V validity period setting process (S2503) is performed.

In the distribution member operation process (S2502), a timer for measuring the operation time of the distribution member 71 is set, and the distribution member is released when the distribution member 71 is released at the timing using the timer. The solenoid 73 is turned on, and the distribution member solenoid 73 is turned off when the closing timing of the distribution member 71 is reached. As a result, the distribution member 71 moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the distribution member 71 is first controlled to the passage blocking state (the state shown by the broken line in FIG. 2) for 8 ms from the start of the opening of the small hit game. This is called the pre-opening interval. Subsequently, the passage is controlled to the allowed passage state (the state shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 2) for 4600 ms. This is called 1V opening. Then, the passage blocking state is controlled for 16392 ms. This is called the open interval. After that, the passage is controlled again for 4600 ms. This is called 2V opening. Then, it is controlled to the passage blocking state for 3000 ms. This is called the post-closure interval. Such a series of operations including "interval before opening ⇒ first V opening ⇒ interval between opening ⇒ second V opening ⇒ interval after closing" is a constant operation of the distribution member 71.

Further, in the V valid period setting process (S2503), the V valid period is set for the constant operation of the distribution member 71 as described above. The V valid period is a period in which the V flag is turned ON by regarding the detection as valid when the detection by the specific area sensor 39a is performed. As shown in FIG. 55 (d), the V valid period is from the start of opening of the specific region 39 (when the distribution member 71 is controlled to the passage allowable state) to the elapse of a predetermined time. The predetermined time is set to be longer than the opening time of the specific region 39 (the time during which the distribution member 71 is controlled in the passage allowable state). This is in consideration of the time lag until the game ball that has passed the arrangement position of the distribution member 71 reaches the specific area 39.

Specifically, in the V validity period setting process (S2503), a timer for measuring the V validity period is set, and V is valid when it is time to enable the specific area 39 based on the timekeeping using the timer. The flag is turned on, and when it is time to invalidate the specific area 39, the V valid flag is turned off. In step S2602 of the specific area sensor detection process (S108) described later, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in effect by determining whether or not the V valid flag is ON.

Following the V validity period setting process (S2503), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the distribution member 71 has been completed (S2504). Specifically, the total operating time (28600 ms) from the start to the end of the constant operation of the distribution member 71 based on the timer for measuring the operation time of the distribution member 71 set in step S2502. It is determined whether or not 55 (c)) has passed. Then, if the operation of the distribution member 71 is not completed, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the operation of the distribution member 71 is completed, the distribution member operation flag is turned off (S2505), and then this process is completed.

Here, based on FIG. 55, the relationship between the constant operation of the distribution member 71 as described above and the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 (opening / closing member 37) in the small hit game will be described. In this embodiment, there are three opening patterns shown in FIGS. 55 (b), (e), and (f) as opening patterns of the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game. Note that FIG. 55A shows the timing of the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol in order to make it easy to understand the start timing of the small hit game.

The opening pattern shown in FIG. 55B is an opening pattern selected when a small hit is won in the lottery of Special FIG. That is, it is an opening pattern selected when "10R time saving small hit C" or "10R normal small hit" (see FIG. 9) is won. This opening pattern is a passing opening pattern (first passing opening pattern) capable of passing through the specific area 39.

More specifically, this first pass opening pattern closes the second big winning opening 35 for 8ms, then opens the second big winning opening 35 for 1600ms, and then closes the second big winning opening 35 for 6000ms. It is an open pattern. In other words, the small hit game executed in this opening pattern includes an opening in which the second big winning opening 35 is closed for 8 ms, a small hit opening game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened for 1600 ms, and 6000 ms. Includes a post-closed interval in which the second winning opening 35 is closed.

When the second prize opening 35 is opened in such an opening pattern, the distribution member is used during the opening period of the second prize opening 35 over 1600 ms and during the period of 3000 ms after the closing of the second prize opening 35. Upon opening the first V of 71, the distribution member 71 is in a pass-allowed state (see FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c)). Therefore, no matter what timing the game ball wins in the second large winning opening 35, the game ball can pass through the specific area 39. In this embodiment, if the game ball is continuously fired by right-handed hitting, the game ball always wins the second large winning opening 35 during the opening period of 1.6 seconds. Each device such as a winning device 36 is arranged. In addition, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening 35 to reach the placement position of the distribution member 71 is 3000 ms (the first V opening of the distribution member 71 is performed from the timing when the second large winning opening 35 is closed. It is shorter than the time until the end timing).

The opening pattern shown in FIG. 55 (e) is an opening pattern selected when "10R time saving small hit B" (see FIG. 9) is won in the lottery of Special FIG. This opening pattern is also a passing opening pattern (second passing opening pattern) capable of passing through the specific area 39. The opening time is different between the second pass opening pattern and the above-mentioned first pass opening pattern.

More specifically, this second pass opening pattern closes the second big winning opening 35 for 21000ms, then opens the second big winning opening 35 for 1600ms, and then closes the second big winning opening 35 for 6000ms. It is an open pattern. In other words, the small hit game executed in this opening pattern includes an opening in which the second big winning opening 35 is closed for 21000 ms, a small hit opening game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened for 1600 ms, and 6000 ms. Includes a post-closed interval in which the second winning opening 35 is closed.

When the second special winning opening 35 is opened in such an opening pattern, the distribution member is used during the opening period of the second large winning opening 35 over 1600 ms and during the period of 3000 ms after the closing of the second large winning opening 35. Upon opening the second V of 71, the distribution member 71 is in a pass-allowed state (see FIGS. 55 (e) and 55 (c)). Therefore, no matter what timing the game ball wins in the second large winning opening 35, the game ball can pass through the specific area 39.

The opening pattern shown in FIG. 55 (f) is an opening pattern selected when "10R time saving small hit A" (see FIG. 9) is won in the lottery of Special FIG. This opening pattern is a non-passing opening pattern in which passage to the specific region 39 is substantially impossible.

More specifically, this non-passing open pattern closes the second big winning opening 35 for 4568ms, then opens the second big winning opening 35 for 1600ms, and then closes the second big winning opening 35 for 2008ms. It is a pattern. In other words, the small hit games executed in this opening pattern include an opening in which the second large winning opening 35 is closed for 4568 ms, a small hit opening game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened for 1600 ms, and 2008 ms. Includes a post-closed interval in which the second winning opening 35 is closed.

When the second special winning opening 35 is opened in such an opening pattern, the first V opening of the distribution member 71 is almost completed during the opening (see FIGS. 55 (f) and 55 (c)). The period in which the opening of the first V of the distribution member 71 and the opening of the second large winning opening 35 coincide with each other is only 40 ms immediately after the opening of the second large winning opening 35 starts. Therefore, even if a game ball enters at the same time as the opening of the second large winning opening 35 starts, the distribution member 71 is controlled to the passage blocking state by the time the game ball reaches the position of the distribution member 71. There is. Therefore, when this opening pattern is selected, the game ball rarely passes through the specific area 39. That is, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39.

As described above, as described with reference to FIG. 55, in the present embodiment, the operation of the distribution member 71 is started with the start of the opening of the small hit game. Then, the small hit game is executed in any of the three open patterns according to the type of small hit. Each opening pattern has a different opening time. Therefore, in each opening pattern, the opening timing of the second special winning opening 35 with respect to the displacement timing of the distribution member 71 is different. Thus, a small hit game that can pass through the specific area 39 regardless of the winning timing to the second large winning opening 35 (special 2V passing small hit in FIG. 55 (b) and special 1V passing small hit in FIG. 55 (e)). And, it is possible to execute a small hit game (special 1V non-passing small hit in FIG. 55 (f)) that cannot pass through the specific area 39 no matter when the second big winning opening 35 is won. It is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the small hit game, the number of game balls entered in the second large winning device 36 is counted based on the detection by the second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the second large winning device is used. 36 The number of game balls discharged to the outside is counted based on the detection by the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area sensor 70a. That is, in this embodiment, the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area sensor 70a also function as outlet sensors for counting the number of game balls ejected to the outside of the second special winning device 36. Then, at the end of the constant operation of the distribution member 71, when both count values do not match, an error notification is performed. After closing the second large winning opening 35, the operation of the distribution member 71 may be stopped when both count values match. In this way, it is possible to smoothly start the variable display of the special symbol after the second large winning opening 35 is closed.

[Specific area sensor detection process] Returning to the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S108) after the distribution member control process (S107) (see FIG. 20). In the specific area sensor detection process (S108), as shown in FIG. 37, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2601). If there is no detection (NO in S2601), the process ends, but if there is detection (YES in S2601), it is determined whether or not the V is valid (S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (S2503) in the above-mentioned distribution member control process (FIG. 36). Specifically, the V valid period is the period shown in FIG. 55 (d).

If it is determined in step S2602 that the V valid period is in progress (YES in S2602), the V flag is turned ON (S2603), and the V passage command is set (S2604) to end the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2602 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2602), the specific area sensor detection process is completed without performing the processes of steps S2603 and S2604. The V-pass command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to notify the V-pass (pass of the specific area 39).

6. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 [Sub-control main process] Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 54. The counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM 94. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 38 from the ROM 93. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, the CPU initialization process is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM 94 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO, the RAM 94 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to step S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 without initializing the RAM 94. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM 94 are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM 94 is initialized, but the power off signal is turned ON due to a power failure or the like. However, if the contents of RAM94 are kept normal (YES in S4002), RAM94 is not initialized. If the RAM 94 is initialized, the values of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. Further, steps S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

In step S4004, interrupts are disabled. Then, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The random numbers for determining the effect include a random number for determining the effect symbol for determining the effect symbol, a random number for determining the variable effect pattern for determining the variable effect pattern, and a random number for determining the advance notice effect for determining various advance notice effects. There are random numbers and so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding the random numbers one by one at the time of updating, it may be added by two. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100. Upon receiving the command, the image control board 100 executes various effects (effect symbol variation effect, opening effect associated with a special game, open game effect, ending effect, etc.) using the image display device 7 according to the command. In addition, the effect design variation effect may be referred to as "decorative pattern variation effect" or simply "variation effect". As the image control board 100 executes various effects, the sub control board 90 outputs sound from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106, and the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp via the lamp control board 107. 5. The VV lamp 68 and the lower right lamp 69 are made to emit light, and the 1000-point bar movable body 15K (1000-point bar right movable body 15R, 1000-point bar left movable body 15L) is driven. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, steps S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed.

[Reception interrupt processing] In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), as shown in FIG. 39, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not the signal has been input to the external INT input unit (S4101). Then, if the strobe signal is not ON, the processing is completed, and if it is ON, various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the reception buffer of the RAM 94 (S4102). This receive interrupt process is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[1 ms timer interrupt process] The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 1 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 40, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, the input process (S4201) is performed. In the input process (S4201), switch data (edge data and level data) is created based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a (see FIG. 8).

Subsequently, the lamp data output process (S4202) is performed. In the lamp data output processing (S4202), in order to make the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the VV lamp 68, and the lower right board lamp 69 emit light at the timing suitable for the production, other processing (S4304) in the 10ms timer interrupt processing described later is performed. The created lamp data is output to the lamp control board 107. That is, according to the lamp data, the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the VV lamp 68, and the lower right panel lamp 69 are made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode. The light emitting modes of the VV lamp 68 and the lower right lamp 69 will be described later.

Next, the drive control process (S4203) is performed. In the drive control process (S4203), as will be described later, drive data (data for driving the 1000-point rod movable body 15K) is created or output in order to drive the 1000-point rod movable body 15K at a timing suitable for the production. To do. That is, the 1000-point rod movable body 15K is driven in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Then, the watchdog timer process (S4204) for resetting the watchdog timer is performed, and this process is completed.

[Drive control process] The effect control microcomputer 91 executes the drive control process (S4203) after the lamp data output process (S4202). As shown in FIG. 41, in the drive control process (S4203), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the thousand-point bar movable body drive data is set in the RAM 94 (S4251). If it is set (YES in S4251), the thousand-point rod movable body drive control process described later is executed (S4252), and the process proceeds to step S4253. On the other hand, if it is not set (NO in S4251), it is not necessary to control the drive of the 1000-point bar right drive motor 15Rm and the 1000-point bar left drive motor 15Lm, which are the drive sources of the panel movable device 15, so the step is as it is. Proceed to S4253.

In step S4253, it is determined whether or not other drive data other than the thousand-point rod movable body drive data is set in the RAM 94. If it is set (YES in S4253), the drive control process for driving a movable body other than the 1000-point bar movable body 15K (1000-point bar right movable body 15R, 1000-point bar left movable body 15L) is executed. (S4254), this process is completed. On the other hand, if it is not set (NO in S4253), this process ends as it is.

[Thousand-point bar movable body drive control process] As shown in FIG. 42, in the thousand-point bar movable body drive control process (S4252), the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the thousand-point bar movable body drive data. From each standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) of the point bar movable body 15K (thousand point bar right movable body 15R, thousand point bar left movable body 15L) via each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the movement start timing to each of the second operation positions shown in FIG. 6 (c) (S4261). The movement start timing from each standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) via each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b). Is the end of the 1000-point bar challenge after the 1000-point bar completed image TB (movable body image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If it is the movement start timing (YES in S4261), the thousand-point bar movable body drive setting process (S4262) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4263. In the thousand-point bar movable body drive setting process (S4262), the thousand-point bar movable body 15K (thousand-point bar right movable body 15R, thousand-point bar left movable body 15L) is performed from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6A. Thousand point bar right drive motor 15Rm and thousand point bar left drive motor when moving to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) via each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b). Processing for setting the speed of 15 Lm, the excitation method of the 1000-point bar right drive motor 15 Rm and the 1000-point bar left drive motor 15 Lm, the current value supplied to the 1000-point bar right drive motor 15 Rm and the 1000-point bar left drive motor 15 Lm, etc. Is.

In step S4263, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the value of the thousand-point bar status to "1" and ends this process. The value of the 1000-point bar status is set to "0" by default, and depending on the position of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K (1000-point bar right movable body 15R, 1000-point bar left movable body 15L), " It is set to "1", "2", or "3".

If it is determined in step S4261 that the effect control microcomputer 91 is not the movement start timing (NO in S4261), it is determined whether or not the value of the 1000-point bar status is "1" (S4264). If the value of the 1000-point bar status is "1" (YES in S4262), it is shown in FIG. 6 (a) of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K (1000-point bar right movable body 15R, 1000-point bar left movable body 15L). It means that the movement from each standby position is started, the thousand-point rod movable body drive control process is executed (S4265), and the process proceeds to step S4266. In the 1000-point rod movable body drive control process (S4265), the effect control microcomputer 91 has 1000 points in the contents (speed, excitation method, current value, etc.) set in the above-mentioned 1000-point rod movable body drive setting process (S4262). In order to drive the rod right drive motor 15Rm and the 1000-point rod left drive motor 15Lm, the drive of the 1000-point rod right drive motor 15Rm and the 1000-point rod left drive motor 15Lm is controlled. As a result, the thousand-point bar movable body 15K (thousand-point bar right movable body 15R, thousand-point bar left movable body 15L) is moved from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a) to the first one shown in FIG. 6 (b). It is possible to move to each second operating position shown in FIG. 6 (c) via the operating position.

In step S4266, whether or not the movement of the thousand-point bar movable body 15K (thousand-point bar right movable body 15R, thousand-point bar left movable body 15L) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6C is completed. To judge. If the move is not completed (NO in S4266), this process ends. On the other hand, if the movement is completed (YES in S4266), the value of the 1000-point bar status is set to "2" (S4267), and this process ends.

If the value of the 1000-point bar status is not "1" in step S4264 (NO in S4264), then in step S4268 of FIG. 43, whether or not the value of the 1000-point bar status is "2" is determined. Judge (S4268). If the value of the 1000-point bar status is "2" (YES in S4268), the 1000-point bar movable body 15K (1000-point bar right movable body 15R, 1000-point bar left movable body 15L) is shown in FIG. 6 (c). The movement to each second operation position is completed, and the process proceeds to step S4269. In step S4269, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the thousand-point bar movable body drive data, and is shown in FIG. 6 (thousand-point bar right movable body 15R, thousand-point bar left movable body 15L). It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start moving to each of the standby positions shown in a) (S4269). The timing of starting the movement to the standby position is when the thousand-point bar union effect ends.

Unless it is the timing to start moving to the standby position (NO in S4269), it is not necessary to control the drive of the 1000-point bar right drive motor 15Rm and the 1000-point bar left drive motor 15Lm, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the movement start timing to each standby position shown in FIG. 6A (YES in S4269), the thousand-point bar return drive control process is executed (S4270), and the process proceeds to step S4271. In the 1000-point bar return drive setting process (S4271), the effect control microcomputer 91 has a 1000-point bar movable body 15K (1000-point bar right movable body 15R, 1000-point bar left movable body 15L) in FIG. 6A. The speed of the 1000-point bar right drive motor 15Rm and the 1000-point bar left drive motor 15Lm when moving (returning) to the respective standby positions shown, the excitation method of the 1000-point bar right drive motor 15Rm and the 1000-point bar left drive motor 15Lm, 1000 This is a process for setting the current value and the like supplied to the point bar right drive motor 15Rm and the point point bar left drive motor 15Lm. After the 1000-point bar return drive control process (S4270), the value of the 1000-point bar status is set to "3" (S4271), and this process ends.

In step S4268, if the value of the 1000-point bar status is not "2" (NO in S4268), then it is determined whether or not the value of the 1000-point bar status is "3" (S4272). If the value of the 1000-point bar status is not "3" (NO in S4272), it is not the timing to control the drive of the 1000-point bar right drive motor 15Rm and the 1000-point bar left drive motor 15Lm, so this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the 1000-point bar status is "3" (YES in S4272), FIG. 6 (a) of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K (1000-point bar right movable body 15R, 1000-point bar left movable body 15L). ), The movement to each standby position is started, the thousand-point bar return drive process is executed (S4273), and the process proceeds to step S4274. In the 1000-point bar return drive process (S4273), the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the 1000-point bar right with the contents (speed, excitation method, current value, etc.) set in the 1000-point bar return setting process (S4270) described above. In order to drive the motor 15Rm and the 1000-point bar left drive motor 15Lm, the drive of the 1000-point bar right drive motor 15Rm and the 1000-point bar left drive motor 15Lm is controlled. As a result, it is possible to move (return) the 1000-point bar movable body 15K (1000-point bar right movable body 15R, 1000-point bar left movable body 15L) to the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6A. ..

In step S4274, whether or not the movement (return) of the thousand-point bar movable body 15K (thousand-point bar right movable body 15R, thousand-point bar left movable body 15L) to each standby position shown in FIG. 6A is completed. Is determined. If the move is not completed (NO in S4274), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the movement is completed (YES in S4274), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the value of the thousand-point bar status to "0" (S4275), and the thousand-point bar movable set in the RAM 94. Clear the body drive data (S4276) and end this process.

[10 ms timer interrupt process] The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 44, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process described later is performed (S4301). Next, the electric chew driving notification process described later is performed (S4302). Subsequently, the V display effect control process (S4303) described later is performed (S4303). Subsequently, the V icon display start processing (S4304) described later is performed (S4304). Subsequently, the V icon display switching process (S4305) described later is performed. Subsequently, the V icon display end process (S4306) is performed (S4306).

In the V icon display start processing (S4304) of the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process of starting the display of the V icon image. Here, the V icon image means that the player wins a big hit or a small hit in the lottery of special figure 2, the big hit game can be executed, and the type of the previous hit (see FIG. 9) is played. It is a kind of effect image displayed on the display screen 7a that can be grasped by a person. The V icon image includes a first V icon image AC1 and a second V icon image AC2. If only the 1st V icon image AC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the big hit or the small hit can be won once in the lottery of the special figure 2, the big hit game can be executed once, and the previous big hit game can be executed. It is possible for the player to understand that the type of hit is a 10R normal small hit (see FIG. 9). Further, if the 1st V icon image AC1 and the 2nd V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, the big hit or the small hit is won twice in the lottery of the special figure 2, and the two big hit games are executed. It is possible to let the player know that the previous hit type was one of 4R time saving big hit, 10R time saving small hit B, 9R time saving big hit, or 10R time saving small hit C. It has become.

In the V icon display switching process (S4305) of the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays a V icon image (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) on the display screen 7a during execution of the variation effect. Determine if it is displayed. If it is determined that the V icon image (1st V icon image AC1, 2nd V icon image AC2) is displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the variation effect. During execution, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. When it is determined that the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has started, it is determined whether or not only the first V icon image AC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. If it is determined that only the first V icon image AC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 68 (b) and 71 (b)), the display screen 7a shows FIG. 68 (b) or FIG. 71. The first V icon for switching between the display of the first V icon image AC1 smaller (the display size is smaller) than the first V icon image AC1 shown in (b) and the first V icon area 7b where the first V icon image AC1 is displayed. The display switching effect command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. As a result, when the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started, the first V icon image AC1 is displayed below the display screen 7a, and the first V icon shown in FIG. 68 (b) or FIG. 71 (b). It will be displayed in a smaller size than the image AC1 (see FIGS. 68 (c) and 71 (c)). Further, the first V icon area 7b is clearly indicated by a chain double-dashed line on the display screen 7a, and is actually displayed (see FIGS. 68 (c) and 71 (c)). Further, when the V icon image (1st V icon image AC1, 2nd V icon image AC2) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, or while the variable effect is being executed, the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R starts. If this is not done, the V icon display switching process (S4305) ends as it is.

Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines in the V icon display switching process (S4305) that the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a (FIG. 61 (c). ), FIG. 61 (c)), the first V icon image AC1 smaller (smaller in display size) than the first V icon image AC1 shown in FIG. 61 (c) or FIG. 61 (c) on the display screen 7a. The first V icon area 7b on which the first V icon image AC1 is displayed, and the second V icon image AC2 smaller (smaller in display size) than the second V icon image AC2 shown in FIG. 61 (c) or FIG. 61 (c). , The second V icon display switching effect command for switching to the display with the second V icon area 7c on which the second V icon image AC2 is displayed is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. As a result, when the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started, the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed in FIG. 61 (c) or FIG. 61 (c) below the display screen 7a. ) Is displayed in a smaller size than the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 (see FIGS. 61 (d) and 64 (d)). Further, the first V icon area 7b and the second V icon area 7c are clearly indicated by a two-dot chain line on the display screen 7a, and are actually displayed (FIGS. 61 (d) and 64 (d)). reference).

Subsequently, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 1 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM 94 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4307). Next, a switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process is performed (S4308).

After that, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs lamp processing (S4309). In the lamp processing (S4309), lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the VV lamp 68, and the lower right panel lamp 69) is created, and the time management of the light emission effect is performed. Subsequently, voice control processing (S4307) is performed. In the voice control process (S4310), voice data (data that controls the output of voice from the speaker 67) is created, output to the voice control board 106, and time management of voice production is performed. As a result, the sound that matches the effect to be executed is output from the speaker 67. Then, other processing such as updating various random numbers for determining the effect is executed (S4311), and this processing is completed.

[Received Command Analysis Process] As shown in FIG. 45, in the received command analysis process (S4301), the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a game state designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). ), If it is received, the game state update process (S4402) is performed. In the game state update process (S4402), the game provided in the RAM 94 is based on the game state information (information on whether or not the time is shortened, information on the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) included in the game state specification command. Update the status status and the value of the time saving effect counter. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side holds the game state information.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a start winning command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if received, performs a start winning command analysis process described later (S4404).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if so, performs a variation effect start process described later (S4406).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407), and if so, performs a variation effect end process described later (S4408).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4409), and if so, performs a special game effect selection process described later (S4410).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4411), and if received, performs an ending effect selection process described later (S4412).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a V pass command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4413), and if so, performs a V pass notification effect start process (S4414). In the V-passage notification effect start process (S4414), a V-passage notification effect start command for starting the V-passage notification effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. The V-passage notification effect is an effect for notifying the player that there has been a V-passage (passage to the specific area 39). In this embodiment, the V-passage notification image 6D shown in FIG. 55 (c) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The display of the character image of "V" as the V-passage notification effect has a meaning as a jackpot winning notification in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that executes the jackpot game based on the passage to the specific area 39. The V passage notification effect may be in another mode, such as displaying a character image other than V or outputting a special sound effect from the speaker 67.

Subsequently, as another process (S4415), a process based on a reception command other than the above command (for example, a normal symbol fluctuation start command or a normal symbol fluctuation stop command) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is completed.

[Starting prize command analysis process] As shown in FIG. 46, in the start winning command analysis process (S4402), the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the start winning command (S4501). As already described, the start winning command includes the information shown in the command analysis content column of the tables of FIGS. 15 and 16 and the information on the number of pending numbers. Therefore, if the start winning command is analyzed, the effect control microcomputer 91 holds the start winning command related to the entry of the starting port of either the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 whether or not the time is shortened. You can see how many are there.

In step S4502, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the time is shortened. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, if the lower digit of the upper command of the start winning command is "2", it indicates that the time is shortened. As described above, it may be determined whether or not the time is shortened based on the game state status updated in the game state update process (S4402). If it is not in the time saving state (NO in S4502), this process is completed, and if it is in the time saving state (YES in S4502), the process proceeds to step S4503.

In step S4503, it is determined whether or not it is a start winning command related to the entry of the second starting port 21 (S4503). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, if the upper digit of the upper command of the start winning command is "F", it indicates that the starting winning command is related to the entry of the second starting opening 21. If it is not the start winning command related to the entry of the second starting port 21, that is, the starting winning command related to the entry of the first starting port 20 (NO in S4503), this process is completed and the entry of the second starting port 21 is completed. If it is a start winning command related to (YES in S4503), proceed to step S4504.

In step S4504, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation effect in-progress flag is ON (S4503). The special figure 2 variation effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is in progress. As will be described later, the special figure 2 variation effect in progress flag is turned on when the special figure 2 variation effect start command is set (see S4606 in FIG. 47), and is turned off when the special figure 2 variation effect end command is set. (S4704 in FIG. 48) flag. In this way, if the special figure 2 variation effect flag is not ON (NO in S4504), the process proceeds to step S4505, and if it is OFF (YES in S4504), the process proceeds to step S4509.

That is, in the start winning command analysis process (S4402), when the ball enters the first start port 20 (NO in S4502) or in the non-time saving state (NO in S4502), the process ends. On the other hand, if the time is shortened (YES in S4502) and the ball enters the second starting port 21 (YES in S4503) and the variation of the second special symbol is not displayed (NO in S4504). , Step S4505. On the other hand, if the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed (YES in S4504), the process proceeds to step S4509.

To proceed to step S4505, first turn on the V display flag. As will be described later, the V display flag is a flag for executing a V display effect for displaying the effect image 6A (see FIG. 60B) of the V display mode on the display screen 7a. The V display effect will be described later.

Next, in step S4506, V lamp control data (one of the above-mentioned lamp data) for causing the VV lamp 68 to emit light is set in a predetermined lamp data buffer of the RAM 94. When the V lamp control data is output by the lamp data output process (S4202), the VV lamp 68 emits light in the first light emitting mode in which the left V lamp 68a lights in a predetermined light emitting color (for example, yellow). .. In the first light emission mode, the right V lamp 68b and the lower character lamp 68d do not emit light, but the right V lamp 68b and the lower character lamp 68 are less noticeable than the left V lamp 68a. It may emit a small amount of light.

Subsequently, in step S4507, the first V sound effect data (one of the above-mentioned voice data) is set in a predetermined voice data buffer of the RAM 94. When the first V sound effect data is output by the voice control process (S4307), the first notification sound (first specific notification sound) called "Pully" is output from the speaker 67. The first notification sound is a relatively high sound, and is a sound that makes it easy for the player to recognize that an advantageous situation has occurred in which the jackpot game can be executed.

Then, in step S4508, the electric chew driving reduction flag is turned ON. As will be described later, the electric chew driving reduction flag is a flag for displaying the driving promotion image 7Y (see FIG. 60B) of the reduced display mode (second display mode) on the display screen 7a. In the driving promotion image 7Y in the reduced display mode, an image in which the vicinity of the electric chew 22 in the game area 3 is illuminated is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "Aim for the electric chew" are displayed. Is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball is being driven into the electric chew 22. In this way, after step S4508, this process is completed.

On the other hand, when proceeding to step S4509, first, the VV display flag is turned ON. As will be described later, the VV display flag is a flag for executing a VV display effect for displaying the effect image 6B (see FIG. 60C) of the VV display mode on the display screen 7a. The VV display effect will be described later.

Next, in step S4510, VV lamp control data (one of the above-mentioned lamp data) for causing the VV lamp 68 to emit light is set in a predetermined lamp data buffer of the RAM 94. When the VV lamp control data is output by the lamp data output process (S4202), the VV lamp 68 has the left V lamp 68a, the right V lamp 68b, and the lower character lamp 68c in predetermined emission colors (for example, yellow). It emits light in the second light emitting mode of lighting. The light emission of the second light emission mode is more conspicuous than the light emission of the first light emission mode described above by emitting light with the letter W.

Subsequently, in step S4511, the second V sound effect data (one of the above-mentioned voice data) is set in a predetermined voice data buffer of the RAM 94. When the second V sound effect data is output by the voice control process (S4307), the second notification sound (second specific notification sound) called "Puin" is output from the speaker 67. The second notification sound is a relatively high sound like the first notification sound, and is louder than the second notification sound. Therefore, the second notification sound is a sound that makes it easier for the player to recognize that a more advantageous situation has occurred for the player than the first notification sound. The second notification sound may be a sound that is easier for the player to recognize a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the first notification sound, for example, a sound higher than the first notification sound, a sound longer than the first notification sound, or the like. There may be.

Then, in step S4512, the electric chew driving end flag is turned ON. As will be described later, the electric chew driving end flag is a flag for ending the display of the driving promotion image 7Y (see FIG. 60B) in the reduced display mode. After that, the electric chew driving reduction flag is turned off (S4513), and the start winning command analysis process (S4402) is completed.

[Variation effect start process] As shown in FIG. 47, in the variation effect start process (S4406), the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (S4601). The variation start command includes information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1003) or the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1009). The variation pattern information includes game state information for designating the current game state, symbol information for designating a symbol as a determination result of the jackpot determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2 (FIG. 9). reference). It should be noted that the game state information, the symbol information, and the like acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 can be appropriately used in the processing to be executed thereafter.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects a variation effect pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation start command analyzed in step S4601 from a plurality of variation effect pattern tables provided according to the variation pattern. Set (S4602). Then, a variable effect pattern is selected based on this table (S4603). Once the variable effect pattern is determined, the time of the variable effect, the variable display mode of the effect pattern, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the presence or absence of the effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 63 (button operation promotion effect, 1000-point stick challenge). , The details of the variable effect including the content of the effect (button operation promotion effect, 1000-point stick challenge) for promoting the operation of the effect button 63, the effect development configuration, the type of background of the effect pattern, and the like are determined.

Specifically, in step S4602, in the effect control microcomputer 91, the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4601 is the information in which the game state information is in a time-saving state and a high base state. When the information is the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (S1003), the variation effect pattern table shown in FIG. 17 is selected (S4602). Then, based on the variation effect pattern table shown in FIG. 17, the variation effect pattern is selected from the variation effect pattern Q1, the variation effect pattern Q2, the variation effect pattern Q3, the variation effect pattern Q4, the variation effect pattern Q5, or the variation effect pattern Q6. Select one of the variable effect patterns from (S4603).

Further, in step S4602, in the effect control microcomputer 91, the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4601 is the information that the game state information is in the non-time saving state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1003). ) Is the information of the variation pattern set in), the variation effect pattern table shown in FIG. 18 is selected (S4602). Then, based on the variation effect pattern table shown in FIG. 18, the variation effect pattern is selected from the variation effect pattern Q11, the variation effect pattern Q12, the variation effect pattern Q13, the variation effect pattern Q14, the variation effect pattern Q15, or the variation effect pattern Q16. Select one of the variable effect patterns from (S4603).

Further, in step S4602, in the effect control microcomputer 91, the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4601 is the information that the game state information is in the non-time saving state, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1008). In the case of the fluctuation pattern information set in), the fluctuation effect pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the non-time saving state is selected.

Further, in step S4602, in the effect control microcomputer 91, the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4601 is the information that the game state information is in the time saving state, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1009) If it is the information of the fluctuation pattern set in, another fluctuation effect pattern will be selected.

At this time, the random number for determining the effect is also acquired and determined. As a result, it is decided what kind of production will be performed as a variable production, including the contents of the notice production such as the so-called step-up notice production and the chance-up notice production, and the combination of the production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. Will be done. Then, a variation effect start command for starting the variation effect with the selected variation effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4604). Here, among the variation effect start commands, the variation effect start command for starting the variation effect corresponding to the start of the variation display of the special figure 1 is called the special figure 1 variation effect start command, and the variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. The variation effect start command for starting the variation effect corresponding to the start is referred to as a special figure 2 variation effect start command.

When the variation effect start command (special figure 1 variation start command, special figure 2 variation start command) set in step S4604 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 , A predetermined effect image is read from the ROM 103, and a variable effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The variation effect pattern is a variation of any one of the variation effect pattern Q1, the variation effect pattern Q2, the variation effect pattern Q3, the variation effect pattern Q4, the variation effect pattern Q5, or the variation effect pattern Q6 (see FIGS. 13 and 17). Special figure 2 for starting the variation effect in the effect pattern When the variation start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined effect image from the ROM 103. Read out, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, normal fluctuation → reach → N reach → development production → battle reach and time saving symbol promotion production are performed fluctuation production, normal fluctuation → reach → N reach → development production → story One of the variable effects, which is the reach and the time-saving symbol promotion effect, or the normal variation-> reach-> N reach-> development effect-> the joint battle reach and the time-saving symbol promotion effect, will be performed. .. As a result, the image KQ of the haze is displayed on the display screen 7a when the time-saving symbol promotion effect is performed by the variable effect, and a stop mode (doublet) suggesting a big hit or a small hit is configured. Notify the player whether or not the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are promoted to the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting a jackpot that is more advantageous for the player or a stop mode (doublet) that suggests a hit. It is possible.

The variable effect pattern is a variation of any one of the variable effect pattern Q11, the variable effect pattern Q12, the variable effect pattern Q13, the variable effect pattern Q14, the variable effect pattern Q15, or the variable effect pattern Q16 (see FIGS. 13 and 18). When the special figure 2 variation start command for starting the variation effect in the effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined effect image from the ROM 103. Read out, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, normal fluctuation → reach → N reach → development production → battle reach and final symbol promotion production are performed fluctuation production, normal fluctuation → reach → N reach → development production → story Either a variable effect in which the reach and the final symbol promotion effect are performed, or a variable effect in which the normal variation → reach → N reach → development effect → joint battle reach and the final symbol promotion effect are performed, will be performed. .. As a result, when the symbol promotion effect is performed by the variable effect, the character image and the character image SJ indicating the "final symbol promotion chance" are displayed on the display screen 7a (FIGS. 70 (a) and 69 (a). )), Notify the player that it is the final chance of symbol promotion in the variable effect executed in the non-time saving state based on the one second special figure hold accumulated in the previous time saving state. It is possible. In addition, when the symbol promotion effect is being performed by the variable effect, the character image BS indicating "Press the button to align 7!" Is displayed on the display screen 7a, thereby producing the final symbol promotion effect to the player. When the button 63 is pressed, it is possible to notify the player that the effect symbol may be promoted (from the symbol without time reduction to the symbol with time reduction). In addition, when the symbol promotion effect is performed by the variable effect, the button operation promotion image G3 is displayed on the display screen 7a so that the player can press the effect button 63 in the final symbol promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify that it is possible to grasp the result of whether or not the symbol promotion of the effect symbol (from the symbol without time reduction to the symbol with time reduction) is performed.

For example, the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4601 by the effect control microcomputer 91 is the information in which the game state information is in the non-time saving state, and is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1009). A case where the information of the fluctuation pattern is the SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern “P02”, see FIG. 12) will be described. In this case, when the special figure 1 variation start command for starting the variation effect in the selected variation effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends the CPU 102. A predetermined effect image is read from the ROM 103, and a variation effect in which normal fluctuation → reach → thousand-point bar challenge → thousand-point bar combination effect → SPSP reach is performed is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. In the thousand-point stick challenge, by displaying the character image TT on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested to execute the thousand-point stick challenge that prompts the player to continuously press the effect button 63. Is possible. In addition, when the first right partial image TK1 (partially movable body image) is moved and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point stick challenge, the player is given 1 of the 1000-point stick challenge. It is possible to suggest that it is a stage. On the other hand, when the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, it is suggested that the first stage of the 1000-point bar challenge is successful. It becomes possible. Further, when the second left partial image TK2 (partially movable body image) is moved and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player is given the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point stick challenge. ) It becomes possible to suggest that. On the other hand, in the 1000-point bar challenge, when the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the final stage of the 1000-point bar challenge It is possible to suggest that (second stage) was successful. Further, in the case where the 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, it is possible to suggest to the player that the 1000-point bar challenge was successful. It has become.

Further, for example, the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4601 by the effect control microcomputer 91 is the information that the game state information is in the non-time saving state, and is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1009). The case where the information of the changed fluctuation pattern is the SPSP loss fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern “P07”, see FIG. 12) will be described. In this case, when the special figure 1 variation start command for starting the variation effect in the selected variation effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends the CPU 102. A predetermined effect image is read from the ROM 103, and a variation effect in which normal fluctuation → reach → thousand-point bar challenge → thousand-point bar combination effect → SPSP reach is performed is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. In the 1000-point stick challenge, the character image TT is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to execute the 1000-point stick challenge that prompts the player to continuously press the effect button 63. It is possible to suggest. In addition, when the first right partial image TK1 is moved and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point stick challenge, the player is informed that it is the first stage of the 1000-point stick challenge. It is possible to suggest. On the other hand, when the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, it is suggested that the first stage of the 1000-point bar challenge is successful. It becomes possible. Further, when the second left partial image TK2 is moved and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested to the player that it is the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point stick challenge. It becomes possible to do. On the other hand, in the 1000-point bar challenge, when the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the final stage of the 1000-point bar challenge It is possible to suggest that (second stage) was successful. Further, in the case where the 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, it is possible to suggest to the player that the 1000-point bar challenge was successful. It has become.

In addition, for example, the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4601 by the effect control microcomputer 91 is the information in which the game state information is in the non-time saving state, and is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1009). A case will be described in which the information of the changed fluctuation pattern is the thousand-point bar challenge loss fluctuation 1 (special figure fluctuation pattern “P08”, see FIG. 12). In this case, when the special figure 1 variation start command for starting the variation effect in the selected variation effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends the CPU 102. A predetermined effect image is read from the ROM 103, and a variation effect in which a normal variation → reach → a thousand-point bar challenge (finished in the first stage) is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is executed. In the 1000-point stick challenge, the character image TT is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to execute the 1000-point stick challenge that prompts the player to continuously press the effect button 63. It is possible to suggest.

Further, for example, the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4601 by the effect control microcomputer 91 is the information that the game state information is in the non-time saving state, and is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1009). A case will be described in which the information of the changed fluctuation pattern is the thousand-point bar challenge loss fluctuation 1 (special figure fluctuation pattern “P09”, see FIG. 12). In this case, when the special figure 1 variation start command for starting the variation effect in the selected variation effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends the CPU 102. A predetermined effect image is read from the ROM 103, and a variation effect is executed in which a normal variation → reach → a thousand-point bar challenge (finished at the final stage (second stage)) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It will be. In the 1000-point stick challenge, the character image TT is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to execute the 1000-point stick challenge that prompts the player to continuously press the effect button 63. It is possible to suggest. In addition, when the first right partial image TK1 is moved and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point stick challenge, the player is informed that it is the first stage of the 1000-point stick challenge. It is possible to suggest. On the other hand, when the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, it is suggested that the first stage of the 1000-point bar challenge is successful. It becomes possible. Further, when the second left partial image TK2 is moved and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested to the player that it is the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point stick challenge. It becomes possible to do.

Following step S4604, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation effect start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4605). If the special figure 2 variable effect start command is set (YES in S4605), the variable effect will be started in response to the start of the variable display in special figure 2, so the special figure 2 variable effect in progress flag is turned on. And (S4606) to finish this process. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 variation effect start command is not set (NO in S4605), the variation effect will be started corresponding to the start of the variation display of the special figure 1, so the special figure 2 variation effect in progress flag This process is completed without turning on.

[Variation effect end process] As shown in FIG. 48, in the variation effect end process (S4408), the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation stop command (S4701). Then, the variation effect end command for ending the variation effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4702). Here, among the variation effect end commands, the variation effect end command for ending the variation effect corresponding to the stop display of the special figure 1 is called the special figure 1 variation effect end command, and corresponds to the stop display of the special figure 2. The variable effect end command for ending the variable effect is referred to as a special figure 2 variable effect end command.

Following step S4702, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation effect end command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4703). If the special figure 2 variation effect end command is set (YES in S4703), the variation effect will be terminated in response to the stop display of the special figure 2, so the special figure 2 variation effect in progress flag is turned off. (S4704). Then, the electric chew driving end flag is turned off (S4705), and this process is completed. When the electric chew driving end flag is turned off in step S4705, the judgment result of step S5102 is obtained in the electric chew driving effect processing (S4302, see FIG. 47) described later if the time is shortened (YES in S5101). It is judged as NO instead of YES, and the driving notification effect described later will continue. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 variation effect end command is not set (NO in S4703), the variation effect will be terminated in response to the stop display of the special figure 1, so the special figure 2 variation effect in progress flag is turned off. This process is completed without doing anything.

[Special Game Effect Selection Process] The special game effect selection process (S4410) shown in FIG. 49 is a process of selecting a pattern (content) of a special game effect to be executed during a special game (big hit game or small hit game). The special game effect selected here includes an opening effect executed during the opening of the big hit game or the small hit game, and an open game effect executed during the opening of the big winning opening and the interval between the openings. ..

As shown in FIG. 49, in the special game effect selection process (S4410), the opening command is first analyzed (S4801). In this embodiment, the opening command includes information on the special figure stop symbol data (see FIG. 9) set at the time of winning determination of the big hit or the small hit.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hit type indicated by the analyzed opening command is "10R time saving small hit B", that is, whether it is a small hit that can pass V that can be won in the lottery of Special Figure 1. Determine if not (S4802). If it is "10R time saving small hit B" (YES in S4802), select the production pattern of the special game production accompanied by the V-type notification effect as the opening effect (S4803), and proceed to step S4805. The V-stroke notification effect is an effect of displaying the V-drive effect image 7Z shown in FIG. 56 on the display screen 7a. The V-driving effect image 7Z is an effect image suggesting that the game ball should be launched by right-handed aiming at the second large winning device 36, and the vicinity of the second large winning device 36 in the game area shines. It is an image. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball is being driven into the second prize-winning device 36.

This V-type notification effect is displayed during the opening of "10R time saving small hit B". That is, if the "10R time saving small hit B" (special 1V passing small hit) is won, the game method will be shown to the player during the opening period of 21000 ms (see FIG. 55 (e)). Therefore, the player can surely win the two kinds of jackpots without missing the opportunity to pass V. In addition, it is conceivable that the right-handed notification is performed as a part of the fluctuation effect at the time of winning a small hit. However, with such a configuration, the player starts to hit right even though the small hit game has not started yet, and a lot of so-called waste balls (game balls that do not enter the second big winning opening 35) are generated. There is a risk that it will end up. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the right-handed notification is given during the opening of the small hit game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of waste balls as compared with such a configuration.

If it is determined in step S4802 that it is not "10R time saving small hit B", a predetermined normal special game production effect pattern is selected according to the type of each hit (S4804), and the process proceeds to step S4805. .. In step S4805, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the special game effect start command for starting the special game effect in the selected effect pattern in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

When the special game effect start command set in step S4805 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined special game effect image from the ROM 103. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If step S4803 has been executed, the V driving effect image 7Z of the V winning driving notification effect shown in FIG. 56 is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Ending effect selection process] The ending effect selection process (S4412) shown in FIG. 60 is a process of selecting a pattern (content) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 50, in the ending effect selection process (S4412), the ending command is first analyzed (S4901). In this embodiment, the ending command includes information on the special figure stop symbol data (see FIG. 9) set at the time of winning determination of the big hit or the small hit.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects a pattern (content) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the analyzed ending command (S4902). Then, the ending effect start command for starting the ending effect with the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4903), and this processing is completed. When the ending effect start command set in step S4903 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the image. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Electric Chu Drive Notification Process] As shown in FIG. 44, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the electric chew drive notification process (S4302) after the reception command analysis process (S4301). As shown in FIG. 51, in the electric chew driving notification process (S4302), it is first determined whether or not the time is shortened (S5101). Whether or not the time is shortened may be determined by referring to the game state status updated by the game state update process (S4402) described above. If it is not in the time saving state (that is, the high base state accompanied by the time saving state) (NO in S5101), this process is completed, and if it is in the time saving state, the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, it is determined whether or not the electric chew driving end flag is ON. The electric chew driving end flag is in the time saving state (YES in S4502) and when the ball enters the second starting port 21 in the above-mentioned start winning command analysis process (S4402, see FIG. 46) (in S4503). YES), if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (YES in S4504), it is a flag that turns ON (S4512).

If the electric chew driving end flag is not ON (S5102), it is determined whether or not the electric chew driving reduction flag is ON (S5103). The electric chew driving reduction flag is in the time saving state (YES in S4502) and when the ball enters the second starting port (YES in S4503) in the above-mentioned start winning command analysis process (S4402, see FIG. 46). ), It is a flag that turns ON unless the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (NO in S4504) (S4508).

In this way, if the time is shortened and the electric chew driving end flag is OFF (NO in S5102) and the electric chew driving reduction flag is OFF (NO in S5103), the electric chew driving effect start command is issued to RAM94. Set in the output buffer of (S5104). When the electric chew driving effect start command set in step S5104 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the electric chew driving notification effect is started on the display screen 7a. The electric chew driving notification effect is an effect for notifying that the game ball should be launched aiming at the electric chew 22. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60A, the driving promotion image 7X in the normal display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the display screen 7a when the electric chew driving notification effect is started. .. That is, in the driving promotion image 7X shown in FIG. 60A, the driving of the game ball into the electric chew 22 is promoted, and an image in which the vicinity of the electric chew 22 in the game area 3 is illuminated is displayed and " "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball is being driven into the electric chew 22.

Then, after step S5104, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the lower right lamp control data (one of the above-mentioned lamp data) for causing the lower right lamp 69 to emit light in a predetermined lamp data buffer of the RAM 94. (S5105), this process is completed. When the lower right lamp control data is output by the lamp data output process (S4202), the lower right lamp 69 emits light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) directly under the electric chew 22. In this way, the light emission of the lower right lamp 69 makes it possible to direct the player's consciousness to the vicinity of the electric chew 22. Then, as described above, as the driving promotion image 7X shown in FIG. 60A is displayed on the display screen 7a, it becomes possible to make the player more aware of the driving of the game ball into the electric chew 22. There is.

On the other hand, in step S5103, if the electric chew driving reduction flag is ON (YES in S5103), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the electric chew driving effect reduction command in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5106), and performs this process. To finish. When the electric chew driving effect reduction command set in step S5106 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the reduction display mode is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 60 (b). The driving promotion image 7Y of is displayed. In the driving promotion image 7Y shown in FIG. 60 (b), although it is smaller than the driving promotion image 7X shown in FIG. 60 (a), an image in which the vicinity of the electric chew 22 in the game area 3 is illuminated is displayed. At the same time, the words "Aim for the electric chew" are displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the situation has changed due to the occurrence of the second special figure hold, while encouraging the player to continue driving into the electric chew 22. The effect of displaying the driving promotion image 7Y in the reduced display mode is also an electric chew driving notification effect.

On the other hand, in step S5102, if the electric chew driving end flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the electric chew driving effect end command in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5107). When the electric chew driving effect end command set in step S5107 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the electric chew driving notification effect ends. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the driving promotion image 7Y in the reduced display mode is not displayed on the display screen 7a. This makes it possible for the player to know that the driving into the electric chew 22 is finished, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary driving into the electric chew 22.

Then, after step S5107, the effect control microcomputer 91 clears the lower right panel lamp control data set in the predetermined lamp data buffer of the RAM 94 (S5108), and ends this process. When the lower right lamp control data is cleared, the lower right lamp 69 stops emitting light as shown in FIG. In this way, the lower right lamp 69 does not emit light, and as described above, the driving promotion image 7Y in the reduced display mode is not displayed on the display screen 7a, so that the driving of the game ball into the electric chew 22 is completed. It is possible to make people more aware of.

[V display effect control process] As shown in FIG. 44, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the V display effect control process (S4303) after the electric chew driving notification process (S4302). As shown in FIG. 52, in the V display effect control process (S4303), it is first determined whether or not the V display flag is ON (S5201). The V display flag is in the time saving state (YES in S4502) and when the ball enters the second starting port 21 (YES in S4503) in the start winning command analysis process (S4402, see FIG. 46) described above. It is a flag that turns ON unless the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is being displayed (NO in S4504) (S4505). If the V display flag is ON (YES in S5201), the V display effect command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5202).

When the V display effect command set in step S5202 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the V display effect is started on the display screen 7a. The V display effect is for notifying that a jackpot game (a jackpot game based on V passage based on a small hit winning or a jackpot game based on a jackpot winning in the special figure 2 lottery) can be executed once thereafter. It is a production. In this embodiment, when the V display effect is started, the effect image 6A in the V display mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (b). The effect image 6A in the V display mode is composed of the characters V displayed in the left effect display area 7L (first display area), which is to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a. As a result, it is possible to give an uplifting feeling that the chance of executing the jackpot game has been obtained once. In the V display effect, the characters "V chance 1 remaining" are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, so that it is easier to understand that there is 1 chance to execute the jackpot game. ..

After step S5202, the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off the V display flag in step S5203, and proceeds to step S5204. On the other hand, if the V display flag is ON in step S5201 (NO in S5201), the process proceeds to step S5204 without executing the processes of step S5202 and step S5203.

In step S5204, it is determined whether or not the VV display flag is ON. The VV display flag is in the time saving state (YES in S4502) and when the ball enters the second starting port 21 (YES in S4503) in the start winning command analysis process (S4402, see FIG. 46) described above. If the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (YES in S4504), it is a flag that turns ON (S4509). If the VV display flag is ON (YES in S5204), the VV display effect command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5205).

When the VV display effect command set in step S5205 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the VV display effect is started on the display screen 7a. The VV display effect is for notifying that a big hit game (a big hit game by passing V based on a small hit winning or a big hit game based on a big hit winning in the special figure 2 lottery) can be executed twice thereafter. It is a production. In this embodiment, when the VV display effect is started, the effect image 6B of the VV display mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (c). The effect image 6B of the VV display mode is displayed in the character V displayed in the left effect display area 7L described above and in the right effect display area 7R which is to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a. It is composed of the letter V. That is, the character W is displayed in a large size by the character V displayed in the left effect display area 7L and the character V displayed in the right effect display area 7R. By displaying this effect image 6B, it is possible to notify that the chance of executing the jackpot game has been obtained twice (double), and to give a feeling of exhilaration more than the above-mentioned V display effect. In the VV display effect, the characters "V chance 2 times remaining" are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, so that it is easier to understand that there are 2 chances to execute the jackpot game. ..

Further, in this VV display effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 60 (c), after the effect image 6B of the VV display mode is displayed, the completion notification image 6C is displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be done. The completion notification image 6C is composed of a mark symbolizing the specifications of the game machine 1 and the characters "ready" displayed below the mark. The mark symbolizing the specifications of the game machine 1 and the VV lamp 68 have the same design. By displaying the completion notification image 6C, it is possible to clearly notify that the driving to the electric chew 22 is completed and the most advantageous situation for the player is created, as will be described later.

Returning to the description of the V display effect control process (S4303) shown in FIG. 52. After step S5205, the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off the VV display flag in step S5206, and ends this process. On the other hand, if the VV display flag is ON in step S5204 (NO in S5204), this process ends without executing the processes of steps S5205 and S5206.

[V Icon Display Start Processing] The effect control microcomputer 91 executes the V icon display start process (S4304) after the V display effect control process (S4303). As shown in FIG. 53, in the V icon display start processing (S4304), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation effect in-progress flag is ON (S5301). Special Figure 2 If the variable effect in-progress flag is ON (YES in S5301), it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (that is, the high base state accompanied by the time saving state) (S5302). Whether or not the time is shortened may be determined by referring to the game state status updated by the game state update process (S4402) described above.

If the time is shortened (YES in S5302), it is determined whether or not the VV display effect on the display screen 7a is completed (S5303). If the VV display effect on the display screen 7a is completed (YES in S5303), it is determined whether or not the V icon is displayed on the display screen 7a (S5304). If the V icon is not displayed on the display screen 7a (NO in S5304), it is larger than the first V icon image AC1 shown in FIG. 61 (d) or FIG. 65 (d) on the display screen 7a (display). Larger than the first V icon image AC1 (see FIGS. 61 (c) and 65 (c)) and the second V icon image AC2 shown in FIG. 61 (d) or FIG. 65 (d) (display size is larger). The first V icon display effect command for displaying the second V icon image AC2 (see FIGS. 61 (c) and 65 (c)) (large) is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5305). By displaying the large 1st V icon image AC1 and the large 2nd V icon image AC2 on the display screen 7a, it is suggested to the player that he / she will win two times (small hit, big hit) in the lottery of Special Figure 2. It is possible to suggest that two jackpot games will be performed. Subsequently, the V icon flag is set to ON (S5308), and this process ends. Here, the V icon flag is a flag indicating that the V icon image (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 correspond to the "hit suggestion display".

When the first V icon display effect command set in step S5305 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are arranged at the center of the display screen 7a. The display is started (see FIGS. 61 (c) and 65 (c)).

If it is determined in step S5302 that the effect control microcomputer 91 is not in the time saving state, that is, in the non-time saving state (that is, the low base state accompanied by the non-time saving state) (NO in S5302), the display screen. It is determined whether or not the first V icon image AC1 is displayed in 7a (S5306). If it is determined that the first V icon image AC1 is not displayed on the display screen 7a (NO in S5306), the first V icon image shown in FIG. 68 (c) or FIG. 71 (c) on the display screen 7a. Set the output buffer of the RAM 94 to the second V icon display effect command for displaying only the first V icon image AC1 (see FIG. 68 (b) or FIG. 71 (b)) that is larger than AC1 (larger display size). (S5307), the V icon flag is set to ON (S5308), and this process ends. By displaying the 1st V icon image AC1 on the display screen 7a, it is suggested to the player that he / she will win one hit (small hit, big hit) in the lottery of Special Figure 2, and one big hit game is executed. It is possible to suggest that this is done (see FIG. 68 (b) or FIG. 71 (b)).

When the second V icon display effect command set in step S5307 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the display of only the first V icon image AC1 is started at the center of the display screen 7a ( See FIGS. 68 (b) and 67 (b)).

If the special figure 2 variation effect in progress flag is not ON in step S5301, that is, if the special figure 2 variation effect in progress flag is OFF (NO in S5301), this process is terminated as it is. If the VV display effect is not completed in step S5303 (NO in S5303), the V icon image is displayed in step S5304 (YES in S5304), or the first V icon is displayed on the display screen 7a in step S5306. In any case when the image AC1 is displayed (YES in S5306), this process is terminated as it is.

[V-icon display end processing] The effect control microcomputer 91 executes the V-icon display end processing (S4306) after the V-icon display start processing (S4304). As shown in FIG. 54, in the V icon display end processing (S4306), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation effect in-progress flag is ON (S5401). Special Figure 2 If the variable effect in progress flag is ON (YES in S5401), it is determined whether or not the reach effect is being performed during the variable effect (S5402).

If the reach effect is performed during the execution of the variable effect (YES in S5402), whether or not the V icon image is displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2. Is displayed, or whether or not the first V icon image AC1 is displayed (S5403). When the 1st V icon image AC1 and the 2nd V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, or when only the 1st V icon image AC1 is displayed (YES in S5403), the display is displayed on the display screen 7a. Set the V icon display end command to end the display of the displayed V icon image (1st V icon image AC1, 2nd V icon image AC2) in the output buffer of RAM94 (S5404), and turn off the V icon flag (S5404). S5405), this process ends.

When the V icon display end command set in step S5404 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a, so that the V icon image (first V icon image) The display of AC1 and the second V icon image AC2) is terminated. In this embodiment, when the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 displayed below the display screen 7a are displayed (see FIGS. 61 (d) and 65 (d)), the first V The display of the icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 ends and disappears from the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 61 (e), 62, 65 (e), and 66). Further, in the present embodiment, when the first V icon image AC1 displayed below the display screen 7a is displayed (see FIGS. 68 (c) and 71 (c)), the first V icon image AC1 is displayed. The display ends and disappears from the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 68 (d), 69, 71 (c), and 72).

In step S5401, when the special figure 2 variable effect in progress flag is OFF (YES in S5401), when the reach effect is not performed during the execution of the variable effect (NO in S5402), or the V icon image on the display screen 7a. In any case (NO in S5403) when (1st V icon image AC1 and 2nd V icon image AC2) is not displayed, this process ends as it is.

7. Flow of the game in the present embodiment Next, the flow of the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. As shown in FIG. 57, first, in the normal game state, the game proceeds by left-handed. In this way, we aim to win a big hit based on the lottery of Special Figure 1. Although the winning probability is low, if the player wins the "10R time saving small hit B" (see FIG. 9) by the lottery of Special Figure 1, he / she can win the two kinds of big hit games based on the V passage.

When a jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, if the jackpot is "9R normal jackpot" (see FIG. 9), the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the case of "4R time saving jackpot" (see FIG. 9), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the time saving state. This fraction is 50% each. In this specification, a jackpot that is won without passing through V may be described as a direct hit jackpot. If the winning jackpot is "9R normal jackpot", the game proceeds again with the aim of winning the jackpot based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 in the normal game state.

On the other hand, in the case of "4R time saving jackpot", it is controlled to the time saving state and the high base state. In this short time state and high base state, the player advances the game by hitting right. In this way, we aim to win a big hit based on the lottery in Special Figure 2. There is no loss in the lottery of Special Figure 2 (see FIG. 10 (A)), and all are small hits except when a big hit is won. Moreover, the small hits won in the lottery of Special Figure 2 pass through the open pattern in the small hit game (opening pattern that can pass through the specific area 39 regardless of the winning timing to the second large winning opening 35). (See "10R time saving small hit C", "10R normal small hit" (see FIG. 9), FIGS. 55 (b), (c)). Therefore, as long as the player correctly executes the game (that is, as long as he / she continues to hit right), the jackpot game will always be executed if the lottery of Special Figure 2 is executed. The jackpot (direct hit jackpot) won in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is always "9R time saving jackpot" (see FIG. 9).

Further, in this time saving state, the second special symbol hold can be stored up to the upper limit storage number during the variable display of the second special symbol. The upper limit storage number of the second special figure reservation of this embodiment is "1". That is, one (predetermined number) of the second special figure hold can be stored during the variable display of the special figure 2. This one second special figure hold will be digested in the subsequent game after the jackpot game.

If a small hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2 in a short time state, and if the small hit is "10R normal small hit" (see Fig. 9), the game state after the end of the two-kind big hit game based on V passage. Is normally controlled to the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case of "10R time saving small hit C" (see FIG. 9), the gaming state after the end of the type 2 big hit game based on the passage of V is controlled to the time saving state. This fraction is 50% each. If the time saving hit (“10R time saving small hit C” or “9R time saving big hit”) is won, the time saving state is controlled again, so that one additional second special figure hold can be accumulated. Therefore, the jackpot game can be executed again based on the second special figure hold saved in the previous time saving state, and the jackpot game can be executed even based on the second special figure holding generated in the current time saving state. Can be made to. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, once the jackpot game is executed based on the time saving symbol (the symbol to be controlled in the time saving state), the game is expected to execute the jackpot game twice thereafter. It is an opportunity. In other words, it is a so-called two-loop game machine when controlled in a time-saving state.

On the other hand, when the small hit won in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is "10R normal small hit", it is controlled to the normal game state. In this case, the second special figure hold cannot be additionally accumulated. However, there is one second special figure hold that was saved in the previous time saving state. Therefore, the jackpot game can be executed again based on the second special figure hold. That is, this situation is a situation in which it is easy to execute the jackpot game due to the holding of the second special figure, which is one of the normal game states (a situation advantageous to the player). As a result of the lottery based on the holding of the second special figure in the normal game state, if the time saving hit is won, the time saving state is controlled after the big hit game is completed. Therefore, by accumulating the second special figure hold, it becomes possible to obtain the opportunity of the lottery of the special figure 2 again, and the two big hits will be confirmed thereafter. In addition, in the time saving state and the high base state of this embodiment, the lottery of the special figure 2 was won, and the big hit game was expected to be executed, and in the non-time saving state and the low base state, the previous time saving state and the high base state were accumulated. The state in which the lottery based on one second special figure hold and the execution of the jackpot game can be expected corresponds to the "advantageous state".

On the other hand, as a result of the lottery based on the 2nd special figure hold in the normal game state, when the "10R normal small hit" is won, the 2nd special figure hold is no longer left and the electric support control is performed. Since it has not been executed, it is not possible to newly generate the second special figure hold. Therefore, the situation that is advantageous for the player in terms of the ease of executing the jackpot game is over.

As shown in FIG. 57, if the big hit game based on the "10R normal small hit" is executed in the state where the second special figure hold is not accumulated in the time saving state, after that, the normal without the second special figure hold is executed. It becomes a game state. Therefore, in this case, since the jackpot game cannot be executed based on the second special figure hold, the advantageous situation for the player is completed.

In addition, after shifting from the time saving state to the normal game state, when the process based on the second special figure hold is completed but the jackpot game cannot be executed (that is, when the game ball is not passed to the specific area 39). However, after that, it will be in a normal game state without holding the second special figure. Therefore, even in this case, the favorable situation for the player has ended.

Here, the mechanism of the end of continuous chan after the control to the time saving state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be collectively described. It should be noted that the end of the consecutive chan is that the jackpot game is no longer easy to be executed. First, the case where the consecutive chan ends will be described. When the consecutive chan ends, as shown in FIG. 58, both the fluctuation of the special figure 2 as the fluctuation (the fluctuation during execution) in the time saving state and the second special figure hold at that time are both "10R normal". It is a case of "small hit". In such a situation, the time is no longer controlled, and there is no opportunity to additionally save the second special figure hold. Therefore, two jackpot games are executed and the consecutive chan ends.

On the other hand, when consecutive chans continue, as shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), at least the change of special figure 2 as the change in the time saving state and the second special figure hold at that time. One of them is a time saving hit (“10R time saving small hit C” or “9R time saving big hit”). As shown in FIG. 59 (a), if the variation of the special figure 2 as the variation is a time saving hit, it is additionally controlled to the time saving state after the end of the first big hit game won in the time saving state. The second special figure hold can be saved. Therefore, it is possible to acquire a jackpot game three times or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the fluctuation of special figure 2 as the fluctuation is "10R normal small hit", and the second special figure hold accumulated during the fluctuation of special figure 2 is a time saving hit. If there is, after the big hit game based on winning the "10R normal small hit" is finished, it is controlled to the normal game state and the second special figure hold cannot be accumulated, but the big hit based on the remaining second special figure hold After the game is over, the time is controlled to be shortened. Then, in the time saving state, one second special figure hold can be accumulated while executing the change of the special figure 2 again. Therefore, it is possible to acquire a jackpot game four times or more.

As described above, according to the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the lottery of the special figure 2 is won in a short time, the consecutive chans will continue, so it is advantageous to save the second special figure hold. Since the upper limit storage number of the second special figure hold of this embodiment is "1", if one of the second special figure hold is stored as the upper limit storage number during the variable display of the special figure 2 in the time saving state, the upper limit is stored. At that point, it created the most favorable situation for the player. This is because if one second special figure hold occurs during the variable display of the special figure 2, the profit of executing the jackpot game at least twice thereafter is substantially obtained. In this way, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball is put into the second starting port 21 in the high base state (time saving state and high base state), and the second special figure hold is 1 during the variation display of the special figure 2. The game will be played to create the most favorable situation that is occurring.

In the non-time-saving state of the present embodiment, when the lottery result based on one second special figure hold accumulated in the previous time-saving state is 9R time-saving big hit or 10R time-saving small hit C, the time-saving state after the end of the big hit game By shifting to, the lottery of special figure 2 is won, the state where the jackpot game can be expected to be executed is continued, and the lottery result based on one second special figure hold saved in the previous time saving state in the non-time saving state. If is a 10R normal small hit, it will not be shifted to the time saving state after the big hit game is over, so there is no opportunity to additionally save the second special figure hold, and the lottery of special figure 2 is won and the big hit The situation in which the state in which the game can be expected to be executed ends is "If the result of the lottery is the second hit in the advantageous state, the advantageous state is continued, and the result of the lottery is the first hit in the advantageous state. In that case, it corresponds to the situation where the advantageous state ends.

8. Flow of effect of time saving state in this embodiment Next, an example of the flow of effect in the time saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 67. First, in the normal game state, if there is no second special figure hold and the "4R time saving big hit"("10R time saving small hit B" may be used) is won in the lottery of special figure 1, the game state after the big hit game is in the time saving state. Is controlled by. Then, when controlled to the time saving state, in the electric chew driving effect processing (S4302) shown in FIG. 57, YES is determined in step S5101, NO is determined in both steps S5102 and step S5103, and the electric chew driving effect The start command is set (S5104).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 60A, the driving promotion image 7X in the normal display mode is displayed on the display screen 7a. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the situation is such that the game ball is driven into the electric chew 22. Then, in step S5105, since the lower right lamp control data is set, the lower right lamp 69 emits light just below the electric chew 22 at the same time as the driving promotion image 7X is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the driving is in the electric chew 22 by both the start of the display of the driving promotion image 7X and the start of the light emission of the lower right lamp 69. In the situation shown in FIG. 60A, since it has just been shifted to the time saving state, no game ball has yet entered the second starting port 21, and "V" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The text "0 chances left" is displayed. Further, immediately after the transition to the time saving state, in the situation shown in FIG. 60 (a) in which no game ball has yet entered the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding storage unit 85a is tentatively stored. When the variable display of the first special symbol based on the special symbol hold is started, the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 on the upper left of the display screen 7a is also started. The left small that is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is waiting and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. The variable display of the symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 will be started.

Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 for the first time after being controlled in the time saving state, the effect image 6A of the V display mode is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 60 (b). .. In addition, the characters "V chance 1 remaining" are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the profit of executing the jackpot game has been obtained once. Further, the VV lamp 68 emits light in the first light emitting mode so that only the left V lamp 68a is lit. Therefore, by both the display of the effect image 6A in the V display mode and the light emission in the first light emission mode of the VV lamp 68, it is possible to strengthen the impact of obtaining the benefit of executing the jackpot game once. Further, at this time, by outputting the first notification sound "Pully" from the speaker 67, it is possible to easily recognize that a favorable situation has occurred for the player not only visually but also auditorily. ..

At this time, as shown in FIG. 60B, the driving promotion image 7Y in the reduced display mode is displayed on the display screen 7a. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the situation has changed from immediately after the transition to the time saving state, and to grasp that the situation is still to continue driving into the electric chew 22.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and then the variation display of the special figure 2 is started based on the second special symbol hold, in the variation effect start process (S4406) shown in FIG. 47, in step S4606. Special figure 2 The flag during variable production is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 60B, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 on the upper left of the display screen 7a is also started. Will be.

After that, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 during the variation display of the special figure 2, it is determined as YES in step S4502, step S4503, and step S4504 in the starting winning command analysis process (S4404) shown in FIG. To. As a result, the process proceeds to step S4509, and the VV display flag is turned ON. Therefore, in the V display effect control process (S4303) shown in FIG. 52, YES is determined in step S5204, and the VV display effect command is set (S5205).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the effect image 6B of the VV display mode is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, the characters "V chance remaining 2 times" are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the profit of executing the jackpot game has been obtained twice. At this time, the VV lamp 68 emits light in the second light emitting mode so that the left V lamp 68a, the right V lamp 68b, and the lower character lamp 68c are lit. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the impact of obtaining the benefit of executing the jackpot twice by both the display of the effect image 6B in the VV display mode and the light emission in the second light emission mode of the VV lamp 68. Further, by lighting the lower character lamp 68c with the character "DoubleLooP", it is possible to easily recognize that the situation can be looped at least twice. Further, at this time, it is possible to easily recognize that an advantageous situation has occurred in the auditory sense by outputting the second notification sound "Puin" from the speaker 67. In particular, since the second notification sound is louder than the first notification sound described above, it is possible to recognize that a more advantageous situation has occurred than when the first notification sound is output.

At this time, the electric chew driving end flag is turned ON in step S4512, and YES is determined in step S5102 in the electric chew driving effect processing (S4302) shown in FIG. As a result, the command to end the electric chew driving effect is set in step S5107. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the driving promotion image 7Y in the reduced display mode is not displayed on the display screen 7a. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the situation is such that the driving into the electric chew 22 is completed, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary driving into the electric chew 22. Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 on the upper left of the display screen 7a is also started.

At this time, the lower right lamp control data is cleared in step S5108. Therefore, at the same time that the driving promotion image 7X is not displayed, the lower right lamp 69 does not emit light directly under the electric chew 22 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to further emphasize that the situation of driving into the electric chew 22 is completed by both the end of the display of the driving promotion image 7X and the end of the light emission of the lower right lamp 69.

With reference to FIG. 61, an example of a variation effect that can be executed when either the 9R time saving big hit, the 10R time saving small hit C, or the 10R normal small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the time saving state will be described. .. The fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 61 is a variation effect based on the battle jackpot variation (special figure variation pattern “P31”, see FIG. 13) or the battle small hit variation (special figure variation pattern “P34”, see FIG. 13). is there.

A variation effect based on the battle jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P31", see FIG. 13) or the battle small hit fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P34", see FIG. 13) is executed in the time saving state, and FIG. From the state shown in c), as shown in FIG. 61A, after the effect image 6B of the VV display mode is displayed, the completion notification image 6C is displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the completion notification image 6C on the display screen 7a, the driving into the electric chew 22 is completed, and the most advantageous situation for the player (the second special figure during the variable display of the special figure 2 in the time saving state). It is possible to let the player know that the situation (a situation in which one hold is accumulated) has been created.

After that, when the VV display effect in the variable effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 61B, a character image indicating "V chance remaining 2 times" is displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying a character image indicating "V chance 2 times remaining" on the display screen 7a, the player can win 2 times (big hit, small hit) in the lottery of special figure 2 and 2 times. It is possible to grasp that the execution of the jackpot game is expected. After the effect image shown in FIG. 61 (b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the display screen is in a state where the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed in a variable manner during the execution of the variable effect. In the center of 7a, the first V icon image AC1 suggesting that one jackpot game can be executed and the second V icon image AC2 suggesting that one jackpot game can be executed are displayed in large size. The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed in a variable manner during the execution of the variable effect. During execution, you can win two big hits (big hit, small hit) in the lottery of special figure 2, you can expect to execute two big hit games, and the previous lottery result is a time saving hit (that is, "4R time saving" It is possible to grasp that it is a "big hit", "10R time saving small hit A", "10R time saving small hit B", "9R time saving big hit", or "10R time saving small hit C"). Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), by displaying the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 on the display screen 7a in a large size, the player recognizes the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2. It is possible to make it easier to do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), when the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the center of the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect, it becomes large (larger in the center of the display screen 7a). The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 (see FIG. 61 (c)) that were displayed (the display size is large) are reduced to the lower side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 61 (d) (see FIG. 61 (c)). (Display size is small) will be displayed. As shown in FIG. 61 (d), the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are reduced and displayed below the display screen 7a, so that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Even when the 8R variable display is being performed, the 1st V icon image AC1 and the 2nd V icon image AC2 do not interfere with the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during the variable display, and are drawn twice in the special figure 2 lottery. Winning a hit (big hit, small hit), expecting to execute two big hit games, and the previous lottery result is a time saving hit (that is, "4R time saving big hit", "10R time saving small hit A", "10R time" It is possible to grasp that it is "short hit B", "9R short hit big hit", or "10R short hit small hit C").

During the execution of the variation effect based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 in the time saving state, it is before the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed on the display screen 7a (FIGS. 61 (c) and 65 (c). ), Than when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 61 (d) and 65 (d)), the first V icon images AC1, the second V. The icon image AC2 is displayed large. As a result, before the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a, the player can win a big hit or a small hit twice in the special drawing 2 lottery, and twice. The jackpot game can be executed, and the time saving hit in the previous special figure 2 lottery (that is, "4R time saving big hit", "10R time saving small hit A", "10R time saving small hit B", "9R time saving big hit", Alternatively, it is possible to know that the player has won the "10R time saving small hit C").

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), a black first V icon image AC1 is displayed and a white second V icon image AC2 is displayed below the display screen 7a. When the display screen 7a shows the player a variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a, the black first V icon image AC1 and the white second V icon image AC2 are displayed. Then, it is possible to win a big hit or a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 2 and make it easy to understand that the execution of the big hit game this time is expected.

As shown in FIG. 61 (d), a first V icon area 7b for displaying the first V icon image AC1 and a second V icon for displaying the second V icon image AC2 are displayed in a section below the display screen 7a. It is possible to provide a region 7c. In FIG. 61 (d), the first V icon area 7b and the second V icon area 7c are clearly indicated by a two-dot chain line, and are actually displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (e), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“2”, so-called reach eye) on the display screen 7a, and the reach is established. To do. At this time, as shown in FIG. 61 (e), the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is continuously performed on the display screen 7a, and the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation pattern “P34”, FIG. 13) is performed. Reach production is performed according to (see).

When the reach shown in FIG. 61 (e) is established, N reach (normal reach) is performed. The N reach is an effect that suggests that the result of the jackpot determination may have been a "big hit" or a "small hit", and functions as an effect for the player to expect a big hit or a small hit. .. In the N reach, the state in which the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and the fluctuation speed of the medium effect symbol 8C gradually decelerates.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (e), when the reach effect is performed, the first V icon area 7b, the second V icon area 7c, the first V icon image AC1, and the second V icon image displayed on the display screen 7a are performed. The display of AC2 ends and disappears from the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (e)). The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 displayed on the display screen 7a disappear, so that the player's attention is changed. The reach performed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the effect. It is possible to change to a production and enjoy the reach production.

Then, a development effect suggesting that it develops into a reach effect for expecting a big hit or a small hit rather than an N reach is executed, and then the result of the big hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit". It is a production that suggests that the possibility is higher than N reach, and it will develop into a battle reach (specific reach production) that is a kind of SP reach that functions as a production to make the player expect a big hit. Become. Here, the battle reach is a reach effect in which the main character and the enemy character battle each other. The battle reach is a production in which the main character has no winning branch and proceeds to a successful production (victory production) in which the main character defeats the enemy character. The success effect functions as an effect that suggests that the player has won a big hit. In addition, the battle reach has a winning branch, and may be branched into a success effect in which the main character wins the enemy character (victory effect) or a failure effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character (defeat effect). In this case, the success effect may function as an effect that suggests that the player has won the jackpot. In addition, the failure effect may function as an effect that suggests that the player has not won a big hit.

In addition, story reach is a production that displays a story related to the main character and finally proceeds to a successful production leading to a good ending. Further, the story reach may be a success production or a production that branches into a failure production that does not lead to a good ending. In addition, the joint battle reach is a production in which the main character and his / her ally character cooperate to challenge the battle with the enemy character, and finally, the main character wins the victory production (an example of the success production). Further, in the joint battle reach, a victory effect or a defeat effect in which the main character is defeated (an example of a failure effect) may be used. In any of the reach productions (joint battle reach, battle reach, story reach), the successful production is a production that suggests a big hit. In addition, the failure production is a production that suggests a loss.

When the battle reach is developed, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the battle reach background image BR1 dedicated to the battle reach is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the battle reach background image BR1 is a background image showing that the main character and the enemy character will play against each other in the battle reach. Then, an image showing how the main character and the enemy character are attacking and defending is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (not shown), and the main character attacks the enemy character before the winning branch. A background image BR2 indicating the approach is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 62B).

After the production of FIG. 62B, as a success production (winning production) suggesting that a big hit or a small hit has been won, a winning image (the main character is pleased) showing that the main character has won the enemy character. (Including the image and the background image SR for success) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (Zoro eyes) suggesting the big hit winning or the small hit winning are ". A temporary stop is displayed at "222" (see FIG. 62 (c)). It should be noted that the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the battle reach is performed during the execution of the variation effect, as shown in FIG. 62, the first V icon image AC, the second V icon image AC2, the first V icon area 7b, and the second V are displayed on the display screen 7a. Since the icon area 7c is not displayed, it is possible to concentrate on watching the battle reach and have fun, and to pay attention to the result of the lottery.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the time saving state, either the 9R time saving big hit, the 10R time saving small hit C, or the 10R normal small hit is won by the lottery of special figure 2 (see FIG. 9), and the time saving state In the special figure fluctuation pattern "P31", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P32", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P33", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P34", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P35", or the special figure fluctuation pattern "P36". Of these, in the variation effect that can be executed based on any of the variation patterns, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting the big hit winning or the small hit winning are temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol promotion effect corresponding to the time saving state (hereinafter, also referred to as the time saving symbol promotion effect) is always executed. Here, the time saving symbol promotion effect indicates that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting the big hit winning or the small hit winning may be a 10R normal small hit. It is an effect of notifying whether or not to change from a symbol without a symbol to a symbol with a time reduction indicating that there is a possibility of a 9R time reduction big hit or a 10R time reduction small hit C. The time saving symbol of this embodiment is any one of "2", "4", "6", and "8". Further, the symbol with a time reduction of this embodiment is any one of "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9". Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern "P31", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P32", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P33", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P34", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P35", Alternatively, in the variation effect that can be executed based on any of the variation patterns of the special figure variation pattern "P36", the effect symbol 8L, which constitutes a stop mode (doublet) suggesting a big hit winning or a small hit winning, Even if 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as symbols with time reduction, the time reduction symbol promotion effect is always executed, but the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R remain as symbols with time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the time-saving symbol promotion effect is performed during the execution of the variable effect, the effect of inciting the symbol promotion of the effect symbol (from the symbol without time reduction to the symbol with time reduction) is performed first. In addition, the symbol promotion means a time saving hit (that is, "4R time saving big hit", "4R time saving big hit", " It is to be changed to a symbol with a time reduction indicating that there is a possibility of "10R time reduction small hit A", "10R time reduction small hit B", "9R time reduction big hit", or "10R time reduction small hit C"). In the time-saving symbol promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the image KQ of the mist is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to overlap the front of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. Gradually make it smaller. That is, this effect is such that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed are hidden by a mist. Then, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear from the display screen 7a once, and then are displayed again in the final stop mode.

If there is no symbol promotion of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the time saving symbol promotion effect performed during the execution of the variable effect (if it is not promoted to the time saving symbol, or if it is originally a time saving symbol), FIG. 63 As shown in (b), the doublet (here, "222") of the same symbol as before the execution of the time saving symbol promotion effect is temporarily stopped and then deterministically stopped and displayed together with the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3. (See FIG. 63 (c)).

In addition, when the term "fixed stop display" or "final stop display" is used, it means that the effect symbol is completely stopped. On the other hand, in the temporary stop display, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol is "0", but it is completely changed by shaking, enlarging and reducing repeatedly at the position where the effect symbol is displayed. The state where it is not stopped. The term "stop display" may refer to a temporary stop display or a fixed stop display.

On the other hand, in the time-saving symbol promotion effect performed during the execution of the variable effect, if there is a symbol promotion of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (when there is a change from the symbol without time reduction to the symbol with time reduction), FIG. 63 As shown in (d), doublet (here, "777") of a symbol with a time reduction different from that before the execution of the time reduction symbol promotion effect is displayed as a temporary stop, and then it is definitely stopped together with the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3. It is displayed (see FIG. 63 (e)).

Next, regarding the small hit effect performed in parallel with the small hit game (first special game) to be executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the time saving state or the non-time saving state, FIG. 64. Will be described with reference to.

First, in the opening effect performed during the opening of the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the V-type driving effect image 7Z is displayed on the display screen 7a as the V-type driving notification effect. .. According to the V-driving effect image 7Z displayed on the display screen 7a, if the player passes the game ball through the specific area 39 in the second big winning device 36, the player can obtain the benefit of executing the big hit game. It is possible to grasp that.

After that, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39, the V-passage notification image 6D is displayed on the display screen 7a as the V-passage notification effect as shown in FIG. 64 (b). The display of the character image of "V" as the V-passage notification effect has a meaning as a jackpot winning notification in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that executes the jackpot game based on the passage to the specific area 39. The V passage notification effect may be in another mode, such as displaying a character image other than V or outputting a special sound effect from the speaker 67.

Using FIG. 65, an example of a variation effect that can be executed when a 9R time reduction big hit or a 10R time reduction small hit C is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 in a time saving state different from the example of the variation effect shown in FIG. 61 will be described. To do. The fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 65 is a variation effect based on the battle jackpot variation (special figure variation pattern “P31”, see FIG. 13) or the battle small hit variation (special figure variation pattern “P34”, see FIG. 13). is there.

A variation effect based on the battle jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P31", see FIG. 13) or the battle small hit fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P34", see FIG. 13) is executed in the time saving state, and FIG. From the state shown in c), as shown in FIG. 65 (a), after the effect image 6B of the VV display mode is displayed, the completion notification image 6C is displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the completion notification image 6C on the display screen 7a, as will be described later, the driving into the electric chew 22 is completed, and the most advantageous situation for the player (during the variable display of the special figure 2 in the time saving state). It is possible to make the player understand that the second special figure hold has been created (a situation in which one is accumulated).

After that, when the VV display effect in the variable effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a character image indicating "V chance remaining 2 times" is displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying a character image indicating "V chance 2 times remaining" on the display screen 7a, the player can win 2 times (big hit, small hit) in the lottery of special figure 2 and 2 times. It is possible to grasp that the execution of the jackpot game is expected.

After the effect image shown in FIG. 65 (b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the display screen is in a state where the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed in a variable manner during the execution of the variable effect. In the center of 7a, the first V icon image AC1 suggesting that one jackpot game can be executed and the second V icon image AC2 suggesting that one jackpot game can be executed are displayed in large size. The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed in a variable manner during the execution of the variable effect. During execution, you can win two big hits (big hit, small hit) in the lottery of special figure 2, you can expect to execute two big hit games, and the previous lottery result is a time saving hit (that is, "4R time saving" It is possible to grasp that it is a "big hit", "10R time saving small hit A", "10R time saving small hit B", "9R time saving big hit", or "10R time saving small hit C"). Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), by displaying the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 on the display screen 7a in a large size, the player recognizes the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2. It is possible to make it easier to do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), when the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the center of the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect, it becomes large (larger in the center of the display screen 7a). The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 (see FIG. 65 (c)) that were displayed (the display size is large) are reduced to the lower side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 65 (d) (see FIG. 65 (c)). (Display size is small) will be displayed. As shown in FIG. 65 (d), the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are reduced and displayed below the display screen 7a, so that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Even when the 8R variable display is being performed, the 1st V icon image AC1 and the 2nd V icon image AC2 do not interfere with the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during the variable display, and are drawn twice in the special figure 2 lottery. Winning a hit (big hit, small hit), expecting to execute two big hit games, and the previous lottery result is a time saving hit (that is, "4R time saving big hit", "10R time saving small hit A", "10R time" It is possible to grasp that it is "short hit B", "9R short hit big hit", or "10R short hit small hit C").

During the execution of the variation effect based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 in the time saving state, the display screen is before the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 65 (c)). The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed larger than when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed in 7a (see FIG. 65 (d)). As a result, before the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a, the player can win a big hit or a small hit twice in the special drawing 2 lottery, and twice. The jackpot game can be executed, and the time saving hit in the previous special figure 2 lottery (that is, "4R time saving big hit", "10R time saving small hit A", "10R time saving small hit B", "9R time saving big hit", Alternatively, it is possible to know that the player has won the "10R time saving small hit C").

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), a black first V icon image AC1 is displayed and a white second V icon image AC2 is displayed below the display screen 7a. When the display screen 7a shows the player a variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a, the black first V icon image AC1 and the white second V icon image AC2 are displayed. Then, it is possible to win a big hit or a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 2 and make it easy to understand that the execution of the big hit game this time is expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), a first V icon area 7b for displaying the first V icon image AC1 and a second V icon image AC2 for displaying the second V icon image AC2 are displayed in a section below the display screen 7a. It is possible to provide a 2V icon area 7c. In FIG. 65 (d), the first V icon area 7b and the second V icon area 7c are clearly indicated by a two-dot chain line, and are actually displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“7”, so-called reach eye) on the display screen 7a, and the reach is established. To do. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is continuously performed on the display screen 7a, and the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation pattern “P34”, FIG. 13) is performed. Reach production is performed according to (see).

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), when the reach effect is performed, the first V icon area 7b, the second V icon area 7c, the first V icon image AC1, and the second V icon image displayed on the display screen 7a are performed. The display of AC2 ends and disappears from the display screen 7a (see FIG. 65 (e)). The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 displayed on the display screen 7a disappear, so that the player's attention is changed. The reach performed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the effect. It is possible to change to a production and enjoy the reach production.

When the battle reach is developed, first, as shown in FIG. 66A, the battle reach background image BR1 dedicated to the battle reach is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the battle reach background image BR1 is a background image showing that the main character and the enemy character will play against each other in the battle reach. Then, an image showing how the main character and the enemy character are attacking and defending is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (not shown), and the main character attacks the enemy character before the winning branch. A background image BR2 indicating the approach is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 66 (b)). Further, when the battle reach is performed during the execution of the variation effect, as shown in FIG. 66, the first V icon image AC1, the second V icon image AC2, the first V icon area 7b, and the second V are displayed on the display screen 7a. Since the icon area 7c is not displayed, it is possible to concentrate on watching the battle reach and have fun, and to pay attention to the result of the lottery.

After the production of FIG. 66 (b), as a success production (winning production) suggesting that a big hit or a small hit has been won, a winning image (the main character is pleased) showing that the main character has won the enemy character. (Including the image and the background image SR for success) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (Zoro eyes) suggesting the big hit winning or the small hit winning are ". 777 ”is displayed as a temporary stop (see FIG. 66 (c)). It should be noted that the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed on the display screen 7a.

After the effect of FIG. 66 (c), as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the time saving symbol promotion effect is performed during the execution of the variable effect. At that time, the effect of promoting the effect symbol (from the symbol without time reduction to the design with time reduction) is performed by the time reduction symbol promotion effect, and as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the image KQ of the mist is produced on the display screen 7a. , 8C, 8R are displayed so as to overlap in front of them, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are gradually reduced. That is, this effect is such that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed are hidden by a mist. Then, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear from the display screen 7a once, and then are displayed again in the final stop mode.

In the time-saving symbol promotion effect performed during the execution of the variable effect, if there is no symbol promotion of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (when the symbol is originally a time-saving symbol), as shown in FIG. 67 (b). The doublet (here, "777") of the same symbol as before the execution of the time saving symbol promotion effect is temporarily stopped and then definitively stopped and displayed together with the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 (see FIG. 67 (c)). ..

Next, using FIGS. 68 to 70, 9R time saving big hit, 10R time saving small hit C, or 10R normal small by lottery in the non-time saving state based on one second special figure hold saved in the previous time saving state. An example of a variable effect that can be executed when one of the hits is won will be described. An example of the variation effect shown in FIGS. 68 to 70 is a battle jackpot variation (see special figure variation pattern “P31”, FIG. 13) or a battle small hit variation (see special figure variation pattern “P34”, FIG. 13). It is a variable production based on.

When the execution of the variable effect is started based on the lottery result of one second special figure hold accumulated in the previous time saving state, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), "V chance remaining 1 time" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The character image indicating "" is displayed. When a character image indicating "V chance 1 remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7a, the player is given a win (big hit, small hit) in the lottery of Special Figure 2 and one big hit game. It is possible to understand that execution is expected. Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 on the upper left of the display screen 7a is also started. Will be.

After the effect image shown in FIG. 68 (a) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the first V icon image is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not variablely displayed. Only AC1 is displayed. Only the 1st V icon image AC1 larger (larger in display size) than the 1st V icon image AC1 shown in FIG. 68 (c) is displayed in the state where the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not variablely displayed on the display screen 7a. By being displayed, the player wins a win (big hit, small hit) in one lottery for holding the second special figure that was saved in the previous time saving state during the execution of the variable effect, and one big hit. It is possible to understand that the game is expected to be executed and that the 10R normal small hit is won in the previous lottery and the big hit game executed is controlled to the non-time saving state. Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, by displaying the first V icon image AC1 in a large size on the display screen 7a, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the first V icon image AC1. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), as compared with the case where the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 61 (c) and 65 (c)). By displaying the first V icon image AC1 in a large size (the display size is large), it is possible to easily recognize that only the first V icon image AC1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the center of the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect. When the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the center of the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect, the first V icon image AC1 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 68 (b)). (See) will be displayed in a reduced size below the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 68 (c). As shown in FIG. 68 (c), the first V icon image AC1 is reduced and displayed below the display screen 7a, which interferes with the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R at the center of the display screen 7a. The lottery of the special figure 2 is that you have won a small hit or a big hit, you can expect to execute one big hit game, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 in the previous time saving state is It is possible to grasp that the 10R normal small hit is controlled to a non-time saving state after the end of the big hit game executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), a black first V icon image AC1 is displayed below the display screen 7a. By displaying the black first V icon image AC1 on the display screen 7a, the player has won a small hit or a big hit in the lottery of the special figure 2, and the execution of one big hit game can be performed. It is possible to understand that the lottery result of the special figure 2 in the previous time saving state is controlled to the non-time saving state after the end of the big hit game executed by winning the 10R normal small hit. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), it is possible to provide a first V icon area 7b for displaying the first V icon image AC1 in a section below the display screen 7a. In FIG. 68 (c), the first V icon region 7b is clearly indicated by a chain double-dashed line and is actually displayed.

During the execution of the variation effect based on the lottery result of one second special figure hold saved in the previous time saving state, the effect before the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed on the display screen 7a (FIG. 68) (See (b)), the first V icon image AC1 is larger (the display size is larger) than when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 68 (c)). ) Is displayed. As a result, before the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a, the player can win a big hit or a small hit once in the special drawing 2 lottery, and once. To understand that the jackpot game can be executed and that the lottery result of the special figure 2 in the previous time saving state is controlled to the non-time saving state after the end of the big hit game executed by winning the 10R normal small hit. It becomes possible to make it easier.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“2”, so-called reach eye) on the display screen 7a, and the reach is established. To do. At this time, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is continuously performed on the display screen 7a, and the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation pattern “P34”, FIG. 13) is performed. Reach production is performed according to (see).

When the reach shown in FIG. 68 (d) is established, when the N reach (normal reach) is performed, the display of the 1st V icon area 7b and the 1st V icon image AC1 displayed on the display screen 7a ends, and the display screen 7a Will disappear from (see FIG. 68 (d)). By eliminating the display of the first V icon image AC1 displayed on the display screen 7a, it is possible to entertain the reach effect by paying attention to the reach effect performed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variable effect. It will be possible.

When the battle reach is developed, first, as shown in FIG. 69A, the battle reach background image BR1 dedicated to the battle reach is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the battle reach background image BR1 is a background image showing that the main character and the enemy character will play against each other in the battle reach. Then, an image showing how the main character and the enemy character are attacking and defending is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (not shown), and the main character attacks the enemy character before the winning branch. A background image BR2 indicating the approach is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 69 (b)). Further, when the battle reach is performed during the execution of the variation effect, as shown in FIG. 69, the first V icon image AC and the first V icon area 7b are not displayed on the display screen 7a, so that the first V icon image AC and the first V icon area 7b are not displayed. It will be possible to have fun watching the battle reach and pay attention to the result of the lottery.

After the production of FIG. 69 (b), as a success production (winning production) suggesting that a big hit or a small hit has been won, a winning image (the main character is pleased) showing that the main character has won the enemy character. (Including the image and the background image SR for success) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (Zoro eyes) suggesting the big hit winning or the small hit winning are ". A temporary stop is displayed at "222" (see FIG. 69 (c)). It should be noted that the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed on the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 69 (c), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting winning on the display screen 7a are the symbols without time reduction (in FIG. 69 (c), The temporary stop display at "222") corresponds to the "suggestion effect".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the special figure variation pattern " P31 ”, special figure fluctuation pattern“ P32 ”, special figure fluctuation pattern“ P33 ”, special figure fluctuation pattern“ P34 ”, special figure fluctuation pattern“ P35 ”, or special figure fluctuation pattern“ P36 ” The variation effect is executed based on the pattern. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that constitute the stop mode (doublet) suggesting a big hit or a small hit are displayed as a temporary stop in the variable effect, the symbol promotion effect corresponding to the non-time saving state is always displayed. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the final symbol promotion effect) is executed. Here, the final symbol promotion effect suggests that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting a big hit winning or a small hit winning may be a 10R normal small hit. It is an effect of notifying whether or not to change from a symbol without time reduction to a symbol with time reduction, which suggests that there is a possibility of a 9R time reduction big hit or a 10R time reduction small hit C. Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern "P31", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P32", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P33", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P34", the special figure fluctuation pattern "P35", Alternatively, in the variation effect that can be executed based on any of the variation patterns of the special figure variation pattern "P36", the effect symbol 8L, which constitutes a stop mode (doublet) suggesting a big hit winning or a small hit winning, Even if 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as symbols with time reduction, the time reduction symbol promotion effect is always executed, but the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R remain as symbols with time reduction.

In the present embodiment, the final symbol promotion effect and the time-saving symbol promotion effect are different symbol promotion effects. Further, the effect mode of the final symbol promotion effect (the effect mode shown in FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (b) and the effect mode shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (b)) is the effect of the time-saving symbol promotion effect. The effect mode is different from the mode (the effect mode shown in FIG. 63 (a) and the effect mode shown in FIG. 67 (a)). The effect modes shown in FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (b) of the final symbol promotion effect correspond to "an effect mode similar to that of a specific promotion effect".

After the effect of FIG. 69 (c), as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the final symbol promotion effect is executed at the end of the variable effect. Here, in the final symbol promotion effect, an effect of urging the pressing operation of the effect button 63 and an effect of inciting the symbol promotion of the effect symbol (change from the symbol without time reduction to the symbol with time reduction) are performed. In the final symbol promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 70A, a character image and a character image SJ indicating a "final symbol promotion chance" are displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the character image and the character image SJ indicating the "final symbol promotion chance" on the display screen 7a, the player is executed in the non-time saving state based on the one second special figure hold accumulated in the previous time saving state. It is possible to make the player understand that it is the final chance of promotion of the symbol in the variable effect.

In the final symbol promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 70A, on the display screen 7a, a character image BS indicating "press a button to align 7!" Is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the character image BS is displayed on the display screen 7a and the player presses the effect button 63 in the final symbol promotion effect, the effect symbol is promoted (from the symbol without time reduction to the symbol with time reduction). It is possible to make the player understand that there is a possibility of being affected.

After that, in the final symbol promotion effect, a period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is valid (button operation valid period) occurs, and with the occurrence of this button operation valid period, FIG. 70 (b) or FIG. 73 (b) occurs. ), An effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 63 (button operation promotion effect) is performed. In the button operation promotion effect, the button operation promotion image G3 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The button operation promotion image G3 includes an image imitating the effect button 63 (effect button image G31), an image showing the operation mode (that is, pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (pressing operation image G32), and a button operation valid period. An image showing the remaining time (operation valid period remaining time image G33) is included. The operation valid period remaining time image G33 is composed of a linear progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. After that, in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 63 during the button operation valid period, or after the button operation valid period elapses without the effect button 63 being operated during the button operation valid period, the symbol of the effect symbol is promoted. When (a symbol without a time reduction to a symbol with a time reduction) is performed, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), an effect image TG showing the main character is displayed on the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 70 (c), by displaying the effect image TG showing the main character on the display screen 7a, the player is promoted to the effect symbol in the final symbol promotion effect (from the symbol without time reduction to the design with time reduction). ) Has been performed, it becomes possible for the player to grasp.

After that, when the execution of the final symbol promotion effect in the variable effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), doublet (here, "777") of the symbol with a time reduction different from that before the execution of the final symbol promotion effect appears. Temporary stop display is displayed, and then the stop display is definitively displayed together with the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 (see FIG. 70 (e)).

On the other hand, when the effect button 63 is pressed during the button operation valid period, or after the button operation valid period elapses without the effect button 63 being operated during the button operation valid period, the effect symbol 8L, If there is no symbol promotion for 8C and 8R (when it is not promoted to a symbol with time reduction), as shown in FIG. 70 (f), doublet of the same symbol as before the execution of the final symbol promotion effect (here, "222"). ) Is temporarily stopped and then definitively stopped and displayed together with the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 (see FIG. 70 (g)).

Next, using FIGS. 71 to 73, the lottery result in the non-time saving state based on one second special figure hold accumulated in the previous time saving state different from the production example shown in FIGS. 68 to 70 is a 9R time saving jackpot. , Or, an example of the variation effect that can be executed when the 10R time reduction small hit C is won will be described. An example of the variation effect shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 is a battle jackpot variation (see special figure variation pattern “P31”, FIG. 13) or a battle small hit variation (see special figure variation pattern “P34”, FIG. 13). It is a variable production based on.

After the effect image shown in FIG. 71 (a) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the first V icon image is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not variablely displayed. Only AC1 is displayed. Only the 1st V icon image AC1 larger (larger in display size) than the 1st V icon image AC1 shown in FIG. 71 (c) is displayed in the state where the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not variablely displayed on the display screen 7a. By being displayed, the player wins a win (big hit, small hit) in one lottery for holding the second special figure that was saved in the previous time saving state during the execution of the variable effect, and one big hit. It is possible to understand that the game is expected to be executed and that the 10R normal small hit is won in the previous lottery and the big hit game executed is controlled to the non-time saving state. Further, as shown in FIG. 71B, by displaying the first V icon image AC1 in a large size on the display screen 7a, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the first V icon image AC1. Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), as compared with the case where the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 61 (c) and 65 (c)). By displaying the 1st V icon image AC1 in a large size (large display size), it is possible to easily recognize that only the 1st V icon image AC1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the center of the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect. When the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the center of the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect, the first V icon image AC1 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 71 (b)). (See) is reduced and displayed below the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 71 (c). As shown in FIG. 71 (c), the first V icon image AC1 is reduced and displayed below the display screen 7a, which interferes with the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R at the center of the display screen 7a. The lottery of the special figure 2 is that you have won a small hit or a big hit, you can expect to execute one big hit game, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 in the previous time saving state is It is possible to grasp that the 10R normal small hit is controlled to a non-time saving state after the end of the big hit game executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), a black first V icon image AC1 is displayed below the display screen 7a. By displaying the black first V icon image AC1 on the display screen 7a, the player has won a small hit or a big hit in the lottery of the special figure 2, and the execution of one big hit game can be performed. It is possible to understand that the lottery result of the special figure 2 in the previous time saving state is controlled to the non-time saving state after the end of the big hit game executed by winning the 10R normal small hit. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), it is possible to provide a first V icon area 7b for displaying the first V icon image AC1 in a section below the display screen 7a. In FIG. 71 (c), the first V icon region 7b is clearly indicated by a chain double-dashed line and is actually displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“7”, so-called reach eye) on the display screen 7a, and the reach is established. To do. At this time, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is continuously performed on the display screen 7a, and the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation pattern “P34”, FIG. 13) is performed. Reach production is performed according to (see).

When the reach shown in FIG. 71 (d) is established, when N reach (normal reach) is performed, the display of the first V icon area 7b and the first V icon image AC1 displayed on the display screen 7a ends, and the display screen 7a Will disappear from (see FIG. 71 (d)). By eliminating the display of the first V icon image AC1 displayed on the display screen 7a, it is possible to entertain the reach effect by paying attention to the reach effect performed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variable effect. It will be possible.

When the battle reach is developed, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), the battle reach background image BR1 dedicated to the battle reach is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the battle reach background image BR1 is a background image showing that the main character and the enemy character will play against each other in the battle reach. Then, an image showing how the main character and the enemy character are attacking and defending is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (not shown), and the main character attacks the enemy character before the winning branch. A background image BR2 indicating the approach is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 72B). Further, when the battle reach is performed during the execution of the variation effect, as shown in FIG. 72, the first V icon image AC and the first V icon area 7b are not displayed on the display screen 7a, so that the first V icon image AC and the first V icon area 7b are not displayed. It will be possible to have fun watching the battle reach and pay attention to the result of the lottery.

After the production of FIG. 72 (b), as a success production (winning production) suggesting that a big hit or a small hit has been won, a winning image (the main character is pleased) showing that the main character has won the enemy character. (Including the image and the background image SR for success) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (Zoro eyes) suggesting the big hit winning or the small hit winning are ". A temporary stop is displayed at "777" (see FIG. 72 (c)). It should be noted that the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed on the display screen 7a.

After the effect of FIG. 72 (c), as shown in FIG. 73 (a), the final symbol promotion effect is executed at the end of the variable effect. Here, in the final symbol promotion effect, an effect of urging the pressing operation of the effect button 63 and an effect of inciting the symbol promotion of the effect symbol (change from the symbol without time reduction to the symbol with time reduction) are performed. In the final symbol promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 73A, a character image and a character image SJ indicating a “final symbol promotion chance” are displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the character image and the character image SJ indicating the "final symbol promotion chance" on the display screen 7a, the player is executed in the non-time saving state based on the one second special figure hold accumulated in the previous time saving state. It is possible to make the player understand that it is the final chance of promotion of the symbol in the variable effect.

In the final symbol promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 73A, on the display screen 7a, a character image BS indicating "press a button to align 7!" Is displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the character image BS on the display screen 7a, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the final symbol promotion effect, the player may be informed that the effect symbol may be promoted. It becomes possible to grasp.

After that, in the final symbol promotion effect, a period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is valid (button operation valid period) occurs, and as the button operation valid period occurs, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the effect is produced. An effect that encourages the operation of the button 63 (button operation promotion effect) is performed. In response to the pressing operation of the effect button 63 during the button operation valid period, or after the button operation valid period elapses without the effect button 63 being operated during the button operation valid period, always shown in FIG. 73 (c). As shown, the effect image TG showing the main character is displayed on the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 73 (c), in the final symbol promotion effect executed after the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at "777", the effect image TG showing the main character is displayed on the display screen 7a. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to know that the doublet (here, "777") of the same symbol as before the execution of the final symbol promotion effect is temporarily stopped and displayed.

After that, when the execution of the final symbol promotion effect in the variable effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 73 (d), the doublet (here, "777") of the same symbol as before the execution of the final symbol promotion effect is temporarily stopped. After that, it is definitively stopped and displayed together with the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 (see FIG. 73 (e)).

In a conventional pachinko gaming machine, whether or not a game ball is a big hit is determined based on the ball entering the starting port, and when the result of the determination is a big hit, the big hit game is executed. There is. Further, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, as the types of jackpots, for example, a first jackpot and a second jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot are provided. The advantage for the player is, for example, that the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed is large, and the gaming state controlled after the end of the jackpot game to be executed is advantageous to the player (for example, a high probability time saving state, It may be controlled to a low-probability time-saving state or a high-probability non-time-saving state).

Further, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the result of determining whether or not it is a big hit is a big hit, and in the variable effect executed by the image display device, the effect symbol suggests the first big hit (stop mode). For example, the temporary stop is displayed in "222"), and then the stop display is definitively displayed in the stop mode (for example, "222") that suggests the first big hit without any effect suggesting the second big hit. It ends up. In this case, after the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the stop mode (for example, "222") suggesting the first big hit in the variable effect, the result of the determination of whether or not it is the big hit is the first big hit. By grasping this, I was very disappointed and lost interest in the variable production, and it was difficult to play the game while enjoying the variable production until the end.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 in the time saving state or the non-time saving state is a big hit or a small hit, the variation effect executed based on the lottery result. In, for example, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with a symbol that suggests winning a 10R normal small hit, the time reduction symbol promotion effect or the final symbol promotion effect is always executed. (See FIGS. 63 (a), 67 (a), 70 (a) to 70 (b), 73 (a) to 73 (b)). As a result, it is assumed that during the execution of the variable effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as a 10R normal small hit with no time saving symbol suggesting the winning of the 10R normal small hit. However, it is possible to have hope that the symbol promotion may be performed by the time-saving symbol promotion effect or the final symbol promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the variable effect after the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol without time reduction suggesting the winning of the 10R normal small hit. It is possible to play the game while enjoying the variable production until the end.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the final lottery result in the non-time saving state, which is performed based on the one second special figure hold accumulated in the previous time saving state, becomes a 10R normal small hit and is executed. After the two types of jackpot games are completed, a right-handed hit is made to win a game ball to the second starting port 21, and the left-handed hit is performed in a non-time saving state, not in a situation where the jackpot game can be expected to be executed. 1 The starting port 20 is made to win a game ball, and the situation returns to the situation where the player aims to win the lottery in Special Figure 1. Under such circumstances, in the variable effect executed when the final lottery result in the non-time saving state, which is performed based on the one second special figure hold accumulated in the previous time saving state, is won, the effect symbol 8L, When 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with a no-time reduction symbol (in this embodiment, any of "2", "4", "6", and "8") indicating the possibility of winning a 10R normal small hit. After that, a symbol with a time reduction indicating the possibility of winning the 9R time reduction jackpot or the 10R time reduction small hit C (in this embodiment, any of "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" The final symbol promotion effect for notifying whether or not to change to the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) is always performed (from FIGS. 69 and 70 (a)). See FIG. 70 (b)). As a result, in the variable effect executed when the final lottery result in the non-time saving state is won, which is performed based on the one second special figure hold accumulated in the previous time saving state, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. The player is informed that the 10R normal small hit is temporarily stopped and displayed with a no-time reduction symbol (in this form, any of "2", "4", "6", and "8") indicating the possibility of winning the small hit. After confirming, the player wins the 10R normal small hit, and after the end of the two types of big hit games, he strikes left and wins the game ball at the first starting port 20, and wins in the lottery of special figure 1. It will be a big disappointment to return to the situation where you are aiming for. However, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the variable effect are the symbols without time reduction indicating the possibility of winning the 10R normal small hit (in this embodiment, "2", "4", "6", "8". Depending on the final symbol promotion effect that is executed after the temporary stop is displayed in any), the symbol with time reduction (in this form, any of "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9") It is possible to have the hope that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) may be changed. Therefore, the final lottery result in the non-time saving state, which is performed based on the one second special figure hold saved in the previous time saving state, is 9R time saving big hit or 10R time saving small hit C, and right-handed is performed. 2 It is possible to raise the player's desire to continue the situation in which the jackpot game can be expected to be executed by winning the game ball to the starting port 21. In this way, in the variable effect based on the final lottery result in the non-time saving state, which is performed based on the one second special figure hold accumulated in the previous time saving state, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R win the 10R normal small hit. Even if a temporary stop is displayed with a symbol with no time reduction (in this form, any of "2", "4", "6", and "8"), the final symbol promotion effect is always performed, so a variable effect is produced. It is possible to provide a variable effect that can raise the feelings of the player until the end of the game.

As described above, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, in the variable effect, a temporary stop is displayed in a stop mode in which the effect symbol suggests a big hit, and then a definite stop display is performed to indicate that the player is a big hit. It is possible to suggest.

However, when the result of the determination of whether or not it is a big hit is a big hit, it is sufficient to simply display the effect symbol in a stop mode suggesting that it is a big hit and suggest that it is a big hit. Not able to entertain the player.

Therefore, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the previous lottery result is a time-saving big hit or a time-saving small hit, the special figure 2 in the time-saving state shifted after the execution of the big hit game is completed. In the variable effect executed based on the lottery result, the display screen 7a is won by the lottery of special figure 2, and the first V icon image AC1 suggesting that one big hit game can be executed, and special. Winning the lottery in FIG. 2 and the second V icon image AC2 suggesting that one big hit game can be executed will be displayed (FIGS. 61 (c) and 61 (d)). , FIG. 65 (c), FIG. 65 (d)). By displaying the 1st V icon image AC1 and the 2nd V icon image AC2 on the display screen 7a, the player can be expected to win twice in the lottery of Special Figure 2 and execute the big hit game twice. And the previous lottery result is a time saving hit (that is, "4R time saving big hit", "10R time saving small hit A", "10R time saving small hit B", "9R time saving big hit", or "10R time saving small hit C"). Can be grasped by the player. On the other hand, when the lottery result in the time saving state is a normal small hit, one second special figure reserved in the previous time saving state in the non-time saving state which was transferred after the end of the executed big hit game is put on hold. In the variable effect executed based on the lottery result based on, only the first V icon image AC1 suggesting that the display screen 7a is won by the lottery of special figure 2 and that one big hit game can be executed. It will be displayed (see FIGS. 68 (b), 68 (c), 71 (b), 71 (c)). By displaying the 1st V icon image AC1 on the display screen 7a, the player can be expected to win once in the lottery of Special Figure 2, execute one big hit game, and the result of the previous lottery. It is possible to make the player understand that the 10R is a normal small hit. As a result, whether the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special figure 2 is worrisome, or whether the display screen 7a is the first. By having the player confirm whether only the 1V icon image AC1 is displayed, the player can win the lottery of the special figure 2, how many more times the lottery of the special figure 2 can be won, and the current pachinko game machine. It is possible to make the player grasp information such as whether the game state of 1 is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game executed last time and the type of the previous hit (see FIG. 9). Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game based on the various information described above when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special figure 2 is worrisome is being executed.

Further, if the V icon images (first V icon image AC1 and second V icon image AC2) continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect, they are displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect. There is a problem that it interferes with the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, if the V icon images (first V icon image AC1 and second V icon image AC2) are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect, they are displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect. There is a problem that it interferes with the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the variation effect executed based on the battle small hit variation (special figure variation pattern “P34”, see FIG. 13) is started in the time saving state. Before the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the variation effect is performed, the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 61 (c)). reference). As a result, even if the 1st V icon image AC1 and the 2nd V icon image AC2 are displayed large on the display screen 7a in a state where the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not performed during the execution of the variable effect, the effect is produced. Since it does not interfere with the variable display of the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed in the variable effect, the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a are displayed (FIG. 61 (c). ), From the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 shown in FIG. 61 (c) below the display screen 7a so as not to interfere with the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during variable display. Will be displayed in a reduced size (see FIG. 61 (d)). As a result, in a state where the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed during the execution of the variable effect, the player can pay attention to the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during the variable display. In this way, even if the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed in the variable effect, or the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not variablely displayed, the display screen 7a is displayed. By changing the size of the 1V icon image AC1 and the 2nd V icon image AC2, the 1st V icon image displayed on the display screen 7a while not interfering with the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to confirm the AC1 and the second V icon image AC2.

In addition, if the V icon images (1st V icon image AC1 and 2nd V icon image AC2) continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect, SP reach with a high expectation of a big hit will occur during the execution of the variation effect. When it is performed, there is a problem that it interferes with the effect image displayed on the display screen 7a during the SP reach. Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, in the variation effect executed based on the battle small hit variation (special figure variation pattern “P34”, see FIG. 13) in the time saving state, the SP reach The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a before developing into a kind of battle reach (see FIGS. 61 (c) and 61 (d)). After that, when the developed battle reach is performed during the execution of the variation effect, the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are not displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 62). As a result, when a battle reach is performed on the display screen 7a to expect a big hit during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the battle reach background image BR1 displayed on the display screen 7a and the main character attack the enemy character. The background image BR2 showing that the hero is about to start and the winning image (including the image that the hero character is pleased with and the background image SR for success) showing that the hero character has won the enemy character are the 1st V icon image AC1 and the 2nd V icon. The image AC2 does not make it difficult to see (see FIG. 62). Therefore, it is possible to fully enjoy the variable production by paying attention to the battle reach that has developed during the execution of the variable production.

Next, an example of the flow of the variable effect executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P02", see FIG. 12), SPSP loss fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P07", see Fig. 12), 1000-point bar challenge loss fluctuation 1 (special figure fluctuation) in the non-time saving state. It is executed regardless of which of the pattern "P08", see FIG. 12) or the thousand-point bar challenge loss variation 2 (special figure variation pattern "P09", see FIG. 12) is selected. In the variable effect, an effect (thousand-point stick challenge) is performed to encourage the player to continuously press the effect button 63. In addition, the 1000-point stick challenge corresponds to "operation production".

In the 1000-point stick challenge of the present embodiment, the player is made to continuously press the effect button 63 (that is, repeatedly hit), so that the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is set as the first stage of the 1000-point stick challenge. In some cases, the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed, and the display of the first right partial image TK1 is successful (see FIG. 76 (f)). Here, the first right partial image TK1 is an effect image that imitates the right portion of the 1000-point bar, and is an effect image that imitates the right movable body 15R of the 1000-point bar.

Subsequently, in the 1000-point bar challenge, when the first right partial image TK1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player is continuously pressed (that is, repeatedly hit) the effect button 63. By doing so, as the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point stick challenge, the second left partial image TK2 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the display of the second left partial image TK2 is displayed. It can be successful (see Figure 77 (b)). The final stage (two stages) in the present embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined stage". Here, the second left partial image TK2 is an effect image that imitates the left portion of the 1000-point stick, and is also an effect image that imitates the left movable body 15L of the 2000-point stick.

By successfully displaying the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed). (See FIG. 77 (c)). Here, the 1000-point bar completed image TB is an effect image imitating the 1000-point bar, and the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are shown in FIG. 6 (c), respectively. It is a production image which imitates the completed state of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K formed by being in the second operation position.

The variation effect that is tentatively executed is the variation executed based on the SPSP jackpot variation (special figure variation pattern "P02", see FIG. 12) or the SPSP loss variation (special figure variation pattern "P07", see FIG. 12). In the case of directing, if the display of the 1000-point stick completed image TB on the display screen 7a is successful (completed) in the 1000-point stick challenge, the 1000-point stick united production is performed at the same time as the end of the 1000-point stick challenge. Is executed (see FIG. 77 (d)). Here, the thousand-point bar union effect is a series of operations from each standby position shown in FIG. 6A by interlocking the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L. A production in which the thousand-point rod movable body 15K is completed by being moved to each second operating position shown in FIG. 6 (c) via each first operating position shown in (b). Is. When the execution of the thousand-point stick combination production is completed, it will develop into SPSP reach. Here, the SPSP reach is an effect suggesting that it is higher than the N reach, the L reach, and the SP reach, and is a reach effect that functions as an effect for making the player expect a big hit.

First, using FIG. 74, for example, regarding the execution timing of the 1000-point bar challenge and the 1000-point bar combination effect performed during the execution of the variation effect based on the SPSP jackpot variation (special figure variation pattern “P02”, see FIG. 12). explain. Although omitted in FIG. 74, the execution timing of the 1000-point bar challenge and the 1000-point bar combination effect performed during the execution of the variation effect based on the SPSP loss variation (special figure variation pattern “P07”, see FIG. 12). Is the same as the execution timing of the 1000-point bar challenge and the 1000-point bar combination effect performed during the execution of the variation effect based on the SPSP jackpot variation (special figure variation pattern “P02”, see FIG. 12).

First, as shown in FIG. 74, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started based on the SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern “P02”, see FIG. 12), the SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern) The variation effect based on "P02", see FIG. 12) will also be started. The fluctuation time based on the SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern “P02”, see FIG. 12) is set to 60 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 74, the execution of the 1000-point bar challenge is started at the beginning of the fluctuation effect based on the SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern “P02”, see FIG. 12). When the execution of the thousand-point bar challenge is started, the display of the first right partial image TK1 is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIG. 76 (e)). Here, when the display of the first right partial image TK1 is started, a part of the first right partial image TK1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 76 (e), and the first right partial image is displayed. The TK1 starts straight from the right outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIG. 76 (e)). As shown in FIG. 74, when about 3 seconds have passed from the start of the display of the first right partial image TK1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the entire first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed. As a result, the display of the first right partial image TK1 is successful (see FIG. 76 (f)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 74, the display of the second left partial image TK2 is started (see FIG. 77 (a)). Here, when the display of the second left partial image TK2 is started, a part of the second left partial image TK2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 77 (a), and the second left partial image TK2 is displayed. The TK2 starts straight from the left outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIG. 77 (a)). As shown in FIG. 74, when about 4 seconds have passed since the display of the second left partial image TK2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 was started, the second left partial image TK2 was stopped and displayed. , The display of the second left partial image TK2 is successful (see FIG. 77 (b)). As shown in FIG. 74, when the display of the first right partial image TK1 and the display of the second left partial image TK2 are successful on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. The display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed) (see FIG. 77 (d)). As shown in FIG. 74, the execution of the 1000-point bar challenge is started during the execution of the variation effect, and the display of the first right partial image TK1 is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the image is displayed. It takes about 7 seconds for the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the device 7 to be successful (completed).

About 1 second after the completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed, the execution of the 1000-point bar challenge is completed, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. Execution of the coalescence production starts. As shown in FIG. 74, at the same time as the execution of the thousand-point bar union effect is started, the thousand-point bar movable body 15K (thousand-point bar right movable body 15R, thousand-point bar left movable body 15L) is shown in FIG. 6 (a). Movement from each of the indicated standby positions is started. When the movement of the thousand-point bar movable body 15K (thousand-point bar right movable body 15R, thousand-point bar left movable body 15L) is started, it is shown in FIG. 6 (b) from each standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a). It moves linearly to each first operation position, and moves from each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) while drawing an arc clockwise. I will do it. As shown in FIG. 6C, the completed state of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is formed by the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L being in their respective second operating positions. Will be done. Here, the thousand-point bar movable body 15K (thousand-point bar right movable body 15R, thousand-point bar left movable body 15L) is moved from the respective standby positions (origin positions) shown in FIG. 6 (a) to FIG. 6 (b). It moves linearly to each of the first motion positions shown, and draws an arc clockwise from each first motion position shown in FIG. 6 (b) to each second motion position shown in FIG. 6 (c). It takes about 3 seconds to form the completed state of the 1000-point rod movable body 15K by moving while moving.

After that, when about 3 seconds have passed since the 1000-point bar movable body 15K was formed in the completed state, the execution of the 1000-point bar union effect is completed. When the execution of the thousand-point stick combination production is completed, it will develop into SPSP reach. After that, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P02", see FIG. 12) is completed, and at the same time, based on the SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P02", see FIG. 12). The execution of the variation effect is also completed (see FIG. 74).

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L are moved from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6A at the same time as the execution of the thousand-point bar union effect. After the start, it moves to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) via each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) while drawing an arc clockwise. The time required for the point bar movable body 15K to be formed in the completed state (about 3 seconds, see FIG. 74) is such that the execution of the 1000 point bar challenge is started and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. 1 The time required from the start of the display of the right partial image TK1 to the successful (completion) display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (about 7 seconds, see FIG. 74). Is shorter than. As a result, the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB becomes successful (completed) in the 1000-point bar challenge, and if the 1000-point bar challenge is successful, the 1000-point bar union effect is always executed, and the 1000-point bar movable body. 15K will be formed in the completed state. Therefore, when the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed) in the 1000-point bar challenge, the moved 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L can be shown at an early stage. By raising the feeling of happiness of the player, it is possible to entertain the player by moving the 1000-point stick right movable body 15R and the 1000-point stick left movable body 15L.

Next, an example of the variation effect executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. First, with reference to FIG. 75, an example of a variation effect executed based on the thousand-point bar challenge loss variation 1 (special figure variation pattern “P08”, see FIG. 12) will be described.

When the execution of the variation effect is started based on the thousand-point bar challenge loss variation 1 (special figure variation pattern “P08”, see FIG. 12), the display of the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 75 (a). The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the center of the screen 7a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is also started at the upper left of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“4”, so-called reach eye) on the display screen 7a to reach the reach. .. Further, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are continuously displayed in a variable manner on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R displayed on the display screen 7a disappear, and the 1000-point stick challenge is performed. When the 1000-point stick challenge is started, the character image TT indicating "1000-point stick challenge" is displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the character image TT on the display screen 7a, it is possible to make the player understand that the thousand-point stick challenge that urges the player to continuously press the effect button 63 is executed.

After that, in the 1000-point bar challenge, as shown in FIG. 75 (d), the first partial image TS1 showing the right part of the 1000-point bar and the second part showing the left part of the 1000-point bar in the center of the display screen 7a The partial image TS2 is displayed. Here, the first partial image TS1 is an effect image showing a place where the first right partial image TK1 can be stopped and displayed in the 1000-point stick challenge, and the second partial image TS2 is the second in the 1000-point stick challenge. It is an effect image which shows the part where the left partial image TK2 can be stopped and displayed. The first partial image TS1 may be represented to such an extent that the player can recognize that the right portion of the thousand-point bar is shown. Further, the second partial image TS2 may be represented to such an extent that the player can recognize that the left portion of the thousand-point bar is shown.

In the thousand-point stick challenge of the present embodiment, a period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is valid (button operation valid period) occurs. As shown in FIGS. 75 (d) to 75 (f), the button continuous operation promotion image G4 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the occurrence of the button operation valid period in the thousand-point bar challenge. Will be done. The button continuous operation promotion image G4 is an image imitating the effect button 63, and also includes an image (continuous pressing operation image G41) showing an operation mode of the effect button 63 (that is, continuous pressing operation (that is, continuous hitting)). An image showing the remaining time of the button operation valid period (continuous operation valid period remaining time image G42) is included. The continuous operation valid period remaining time image G42 is composed of a linear progress bar, and the black part decreases from the right to the left with the passage of time, so that the player operates the button. It changes so that the remaining time of the validity period can be easily understood. Further, the button operation valid period ends when all the black parts indicated by the continuous operation valid period remaining time image G42 disappear and change when the continuous operation valid period remaining time image G42 shows all white parts. Can be easily understood by the player.

In the case of a variation effect based on the thousand-point bar challenge loss variation 1 (special figure variation pattern "P08", see FIG. 12), even if the effect button 63 is continuously pressed during the button operation valid period, it is displayed. The first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed at the position of the first partial image TS1 displayed on the screen 7a, and the display of the first right partial image TK1 on the display screen 7a is not successful. In this case, regardless of whether or not the effect button 63 is pressed during the button operation valid period, the display of the first right partial image TK1 on the display screen 7a fails after the button operation valid period has elapsed. Then, the 1000-point stick challenge fails.

When the button operation valid period occurs, the display of the first partial image TS1 and the second partial image TS2 is started in the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 75 (d), and then shown in FIG. 75 (e). As described above, a part of the first right partial image TK1 is displayed. Then, in response to the continuous pressing operation of the effect button 63 by the player, the first right partial image TK1 gradually advances straight from the right outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a. It is possible to gradually display the entire first right partial image TK1 on the display screen 7a. As a result, the first right partial image in which the player continuously presses the effect button 63 and goes straight toward the center of the display screen 7a without looking at various parts on the display screen 7a. By turning the line of sight to TK1, the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed, and it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not the display of the first right partial image TK1 is successful.

However, in the case of the variation effect based on the thousand-point bar challenge loss variation 1 (special figure variation pattern “P08”, see FIG. 12), as shown in FIG. 75 (f), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is continuously operated. Validity period remaining time All the black parts indicated by the image G42 disappear, and the continuous operation valid period remaining time image G42 shows all white parts, so that the player can grasp the end of the button operation valid period. When the button operation valid period ends, the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed so that the entire first partial image TS1 and the entire first right partial image TK1 displayed on the display screen 7a are covered. The first right partial image TK1 is still moving straight toward the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, as the first stage of the 1000-point bar challenge, the first right partial image TK1 is not stopped and displayed, so that the display of the first right partial image TK1 on the display screen 7a fails. Therefore, the display of the 1000-point stick completed image TB in the 1000-point stick challenge fails (unfinished), and the 1000-point stick challenge ends in failure. After that, on the display screen 7a, each effect symbol EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is definitively stopped and displayed at the reach degree that suggests a loss, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 also suggest a loss on the upper left of the display screen 7a. It will be definitively stopped and displayed at the reach of the item.

Next, using FIGS. 76 to 77, SPSP jackpot fluctuations (special figure fluctuation pattern “P02”, see FIG. 12) and SPSP loss fluctuations (special figure fluctuation pattern “P07”, see FIG. 12) in a non-time saving state. , Or a thousand-point stick challenge loss variation 2 (special figure variation pattern “P09”, see FIG. 12), an example of the variation effect executed based on any of the special figure variation patterns will be described.

SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P02", see Fig. 12), SPSP loss fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P07", see Fig. 12), or 1000-point bar challenge loss fluctuation 2 (special figure) in a non-time saving state When the execution of the variation effect is started in the non-time saving state based on any of the special figure variation patterns among the variation patterns "P09" (see FIG. 12), as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the image The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is also started at the upper left of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“4”, so-called reach eyes) on the display screen 7a to reach the reach. Further, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are continuously displayed in a variable manner on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R displayed on the display screen 7a disappear, and the 1000-point stick challenge is performed. When the thousand-point stick challenge is performed, the character image TT indicating "thousand-point stick challenge" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the character image TT on the display screen 7a, it is possible to make the player know that the thousand-point stick challenge, which is a button operation promotion effect, is executed.

After that, in the 1000-point bar challenge, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), the first partial image TS1 showing the right part of the 1000-point bar and the second part showing the left part of the 1000-point bar are shown in the center of the display screen 7a. The partial image TS2 is displayed. SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P02", see FIG. 12), SPSP loss fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P07", see FIG. 12), or 1000-point bar challenge loss fluctuation 2 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P09") , Fig. 12), the 1000-point bar challenge performed by the variation effect based on any of the special figure fluctuation patterns is based on the 1000-point bar challenge loss variation 1 (special figure variation pattern “P08”, see FIG. 12). Similar to the 1000-point stick challenge performed in the variable effect, a period during which the operation of pressing the effect button 63 is valid (button operation valid period) occurs. With the occurrence of this button operation valid period, as shown in FIGS. 76 (d) to 76 (f), 77 (a), 77 (b), and 77 (e), the image display device 7 The button continuous operation promotion image G4 is displayed on the display screen 7a of.

SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P02", see FIG. 12), SPSP loss fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P07", see FIG. 12), or 1000-point bar challenge loss fluctuation 2 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P09") , FIG. 12), even if the variation effect is based on any of the special figure variation patterns, when the effect button 63 is continuously pressed (that is, repeated hits) during the button operation valid period, the image display device The first right partial image TK1 on the display screen 7a of 7 is stopped and displayed, and the display of the first right partial image TK1 is successful.

However, in the case of a variation effect based on the thousand-point bar challenge loss variation 2 (special figure variation pattern “P08”, see FIG. 12), the display of the first right partial image TK1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. After the success, even if the effect button 63 is continuously pressed (that is, repeatedly pressed) during the button operation valid period, the second left partial image TK2 is not stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a. The display of the second left partial image TK2 is not successful. Thousand-point stick challenge In the thousand-point stick challenge performed by the fluctuation production based on the loss fluctuation 2 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P08", see FIG. 12), it does not matter whether the production button 63 is operated during the button operation valid period. However, after the button operation validity period has elapsed, the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a in the 1000-point bar challenge fails (unfinished), and the 1000-point bar challenge fails.

For example, in the case of a variation effect based on the SPSP jackpot variation (special figure variation pattern “P02”, see FIG. 12) or the SPSP loss variation (special figure variation pattern “P07”, see FIG. 12), the image display device 7 After the first right partial image TK1 is successfully displayed on the display screen 7a, if the effect button 63 is continuously pressed during the button operation valid period, the second left partial image is displayed on the display screen 7a. TK2 is stopped and displayed. As a result, the display of the first right partial image TK1 and the display of the second left partial image TK2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are successful, and the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed). Button operation in the 1000-point stick challenge performed by the SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P02", see FIG. 12) or the SPSP loss fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P07", see FIG. 12). Even if the effect button 63 is not operated during the valid period, the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successfully displayed after the button operation valid period has elapsed, and the 1000-point bar challenge is successful.

When the button operation valid period occurs in the 1000-point stick challenge, the display of the first partial image TS1 and the second partial image TS2 is started in the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 76 (d). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), a part of the first right partial image TK1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As shown in FIG. 76 (e), the first right partial image TK1 changes from the right outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the center of the display screen 7a in response to the continuous pressing operation of the effect button 63 by the player. By going straight toward, it is possible to gradually display the entire first right partial image TK1. As a result, the first right partial image in which the player continuously presses the effect button 63 and goes straight toward the center of the display screen 7a without looking at various parts on the display screen 7a. By turning the line of sight to TK1, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed and the display of the first right partial image TK1 is successful.

After that, the straight movement toward the center of the display screen 7a of the first right partial image TK1 is completed, and as shown in FIG. 76 (f), the display of the image display device 7 is performed as the first stage of the 1000-point bar challenge. When the stop display is performed so that the entire first partial image TS1 and the entire first right partial image TK1 displayed on the screen 7a are covered, the display of the first right partial image TK1 is successful. By stopping and displaying the first right partial image TK1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player can successfully display the first right partial image TK1 and as the first stage of the 1000-point stick challenge. It is possible to let the player know that it is a success.

Subsequently, the production example of FIG. 76 (f) proceeds to the production example of FIG. 77 (a). As shown in FIG. 77 (a), a part of the second left partial image TK2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the second left partial image TK2 is displayed from the left outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in response to the continuous pressing operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The entire second left partial image TK2 is gradually displayed by going straight toward the center of the display screen 7a little by little. As a result, the second left partial image in which the player continuously presses the effect button 63 and goes straight toward the center of the display screen 7a without looking at various parts on the display screen 7a. By turning the line of sight to TK2, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not the second left partial image TK2 is stopped and displayed and the display of the second left partial image TK2 is successful.

For example, when the SPSP jackpot fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P02", see FIG. 12) or the SPSP loss fluctuation (special figure fluctuation pattern "P07", see FIG. 12) is performed, the image is displayed. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, all the black parts indicated by the continuous operation valid period remaining time image G42 disappear, and the continuous operation valid period remaining time image G42 shows all the white parts, so that the player can operate the buttons effectively. Make them know the end of the period. When the button operation valid period in the 1000-point stick challenge ends, the process proceeds from the production example of FIG. 77 (a) to the production example of FIG. 77 (b). As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the straight movement toward the center of the display screen 7a of the second left partial image TK2 is completed, and the second partial image TS2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is completed. Is stopped and displayed so as to cover the entire second left partial image TK2. As a result, as the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point bar challenge, the display of the second left partial image TK2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes successful. By stopping and displaying the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to grasp that the final stage of the 1000-point stick challenge has been exceeded. ..

As shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the display of the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is successful in the thousand-point bar challenge, FIG. 77 (c) ) Is switched to, and as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is successful (completed). By displaying the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player is made aware that the 1000-point bar challenge has been successful, and the 1000-point bar challenge is completed. By letting you know that the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is formed in the completed state in the 1000-point bar combination production, the fun of noticing the 1000-point bar movable body 15K formed in the completed state is strengthened. It becomes possible. Further, it is possible to grasp that the SPSP reach is developed by displaying the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After the 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed for about 1 second on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the execution of the 1000-point bar challenge is completed.

The 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the same time as the execution of the 1000-point bar challenge is completed, the 1000-point bar union effect using the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is subsequently performed. Will be executed. Here, the 1000-point bar union effect is the 1000-point bar challenge because the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is successful (completed) in the 1000-point bar challenge. It is an effect using the 1000-point bar movable body 15K that can make the player grasp that the success is achieved and that the SPSP reach will be developed after the execution of the 1000-point bar combination effect.

At the same time that the execution of the thousand-point bar union effect is started, the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L are interlocked to perform a series of operations. Specifically, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are linear from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a) to the respective first operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (b). The move is started. When the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L reach their respective first operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (b), the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body are subsequently reached. While the 15L rotates clockwise, it is moved in an arc clockwise from each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c). I will go. It should be noted that the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L are shown in FIG. 6 from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6A via the respective first operating positions shown in FIG. 6B. It takes about 3 seconds to move to each of the second operating positions shown in 6 (c).

As shown in FIG. 77 (d), the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L are their respective second operating positions on the front side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 6 (c)). By the above, the completed state of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is formed in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player look as if the 1000-point bar movable body 15K formed in the completed state from the 1000-point bar completed image TB displayed on the display screen 7a has popped out. It will be possible to entertain.

In the present embodiment, the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is completed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar are combined in the executed 1000-point bar combination effect. The left movable body 15L is interlocked and moved from each standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) in a series of operations, so that the thousand-point bar right While paying attention to the movement of the movable body 15R and the left movable body 15L, it is visually enjoyable that the completed state of the 1000 point bar movable body 15K is formed in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 77 (d), after the completed state of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K continues for about 4 seconds, the execution of the 1000-point bar union effect is completed (see FIG. 74). After the execution of the 1000-point stick combination production is completed, it will develop into SPSP reach. That is, by showing the player the completed state of the 1000-point rod movable body 15K, it is possible to grasp that the SPSP reach will be developed. In addition, it is a pleasure to notice the 1000-point bar movable body 15K by looking at the 1000-point bar movable body 15K after grasping that the 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It will be strengthened.

In the thousand-point bar challenge of the present embodiment, as the first stage of the thousand-point bar challenge, the first right partial image TK1 may be stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed, the second left partial image TK2 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point bar challenge. May occur. The first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the thousand-point stick challenge, so that the thousand-point stick is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display of the completed image TB is completed. That is, in the 1000-point bar challenge, the player continuously presses the effect button 63, and the effect image (first right) showing a part of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2) are stopped and displayed, and all of the production images showing a part of the 1000-point bar completed image TB are stopped and displayed, so that the 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed successfully ( It is a production that will be completed). On the other hand, in the thousand-point bar union effect, the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L are interlocked, and in a series of operations, from each standby position shown in FIG. It is moved to each first operating position shown in b), and then moved to each second operating position shown in FIG. 6 (c). That is, in the thousand-point bar union effect, the first operation of the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L is shown in FIG. 6 (b) from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a). It is an effect of moving to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) via the position without being completely stopped. From the above, the 1000-point stick challenge and the 1000-point stick combination production are the production image (1000-point stick completed image TB, 1st right partial image TK1, 2nd left partial image TK2) and 1000-point points that imitate the 1000-point stick. It is an effect that uses different movable bodies that imitate sticks (thousand-point stick movable body 15K, thousand-point stick right movable body 15R, thousand-point stick left movable body 15L), and is a display screen of the image display device 7. Appearance method and movable body (thousand-point stick movable body 15K, thousand-point stick right movable body 15R, 1,000-point stick right movable body 15R, thousand-point stick movable body 15K, first right partial image TK1, second left partial image TK2) There is a difference in the appearance method of the point stick left movable body 15L). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the difference between the 1000-point stick challenge and the 1000-point stick combination production, and makes it entertaining.

On the other hand, when the variation effect based on the 1000-point bar challenge loss variation 2 (special figure variation pattern “P09”, see FIG. 12) is performed, the effect example shown in FIG. 77 (a) shows FIG. 77 (e). ) Proceed to the production example shown. As shown in FIG. 77 (e), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, all the black parts indicated by the continuous operation valid period remaining time image G42 disappear, and the continuous operation valid period remaining time image G42 is all white parts. By indicating, the player is made to grasp the end of the button operation valid period. When the button operation valid period ends, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), the entire second left partial image TK2 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, but the second left partial image TK2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The second left partial image TK2 is not stopped and displayed so that the entire partial image TS2 and the entire second left partial image TK2 are covered, and the second left partial image TK2 is still toward the center of the display screen 7a. I'm going straight little by little. As a result, as the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point stick challenge, the display of the second left partial image TK2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 fails. Therefore, the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a in the 1000-point bar challenge fails, and the 1000-point bar challenge ends with a failure. After that, on the display screen 7a, each effect symbol EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is definitively stopped and displayed at the reach degree that suggests a loss, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 also suggest a loss on the upper left of the display screen 7a. It will be definitively stopped and displayed at the reach of the item.

Since many conventional pachinko machines are equipped with movable movable bodies, it is not interesting to simply move the movable body, so the movable body is sufficient for the player. It was difficult to entertain.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are displayed from the outside of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the thousand-point stick challenge. The image may go straight toward the center of the image and may be stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (FIGS. 76 (e) to 76 (f), 77 (a), 77 (b)). reference). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the thousand-point bar completed image TB is displayed. When the display is successful (completed) (see FIG. 77 (c)), the execution of the thousand-point bar union effect may be started. When the execution of the thousand-point bar union effect is started, the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L are respectively shown in FIG. 6 (b) from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a). It is linearly moved toward the first operating position, and then clockwise while drawing an arc clockwise from each first operating position shown in FIG. 6 (b) to each second operating position shown in FIG. 6 (c). It is moved to (see FIG. 77 (d)). As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the display of the first right partial image TK1 is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the thousand-point stick challenge, the display screen of the image display device 7 is started. How the effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 appears until the display of the completed image TB of the 1000-point bar is successful (completed) on 7a, and the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar. There was a clear difference in the appearance of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K until the left movable body 15L was united to form the 1000-point bar movable body 15K imitating the 1000-point bar in a completed state. As a result, until the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB that imitates the 1000-point bar is completed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, and the 1000-point bar movable body in the 1000-point bar combination production. There are different ways to visually entertain until 15K is formed in the completed state. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko game machine in which the movable body is simply moved, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are developed from the 1000-point stick challenge. By moving the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L in the combined production of the 1000-point bar, it becomes possible to make the player interesting and to fully entertain the player. ..

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is set as the first stage of the 1000-point stick challenge by continuously pressing the effect button 63 in the 1000-point stick challenge. The first right partial image TK1 may be stopped and displayed (see FIG. 76 (f)). After the first right partial image TK1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second left partial image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point bar challenge. TK2 is stopped and displayed. When the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed). (See FIG. 77 (c)). If the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, the 1000-point bar union effect is always executed, and the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R is always executed. And the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L passes from each standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) to each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b), and each second operation shown in FIG. 6 (c). It is moved to the position in a series of operations, and the 1000-point rod movable body 15K is formed in a completed state (see FIG. 77 (d)). In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the 1000-point bar uniting effect is executed, and the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are moved to the second operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (c), respectively. Therefore, the time required for the 1000-point bar movable body 15K to be completed is such that the display of the first right partial image TK1 is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge. After that (that is, after the movement of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the center is started from the right outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), 1,000 points are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is shorter than the time required for the display of the bar completed image TB to be completed (successful) (see FIG. 74). As a result, in the 1000-point bar challenge, the player is asked to continuously press the effect button 63 as to whether or not the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is completed (successful). It will be possible to fully entertain over time while letting them do it. Then, if the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is successful (completed), the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are shown in FIG. 6 (c). By moving to the second operation position shown in (1) in a series of operations and confirming the completed state of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K, the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 It is possible to raise the player's feelings about the success (completion) of the display.

9. Effect of the present embodiment As described in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the 1000-point bar uniting effect is performed, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are shown. By moving from each standby position shown in 6 (a) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c), the 1000-point rod movable body 15K is formed in a completed state. Further, when the 1000-point bar challenge is performed, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed. It may be completed (see FIG. 77 (c)). As a result, it is fun to notice that the 1000-point bar completed image TB displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge is completed, and the state where the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is completed. Since it will be fun to notice what was formed in, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are obtained until the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is completed. Is moved from the outside of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a, and is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, until the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is completed, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are displayed in FIG. 6 (a) from their respective standby positions. ) Is linearly moved to each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b), and an arc is drawn clockwise from each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c). And move clockwise. As a result, the player can visually check the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the completed state of the 1000-point bar movable body 15K. Since different fun is provided, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are obtained until the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is completed. Is moved from the outside of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a, and is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, until the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is completed, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are shown in FIG. 6 (b) from their first operating positions. It is moved in a curve by drawing an arc clockwise at each second operation position shown in (c). This makes it possible to provide a difference that is easy for the player to visually recognize, and when the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is completed and when the 1000-point bar is movable. It is possible to make the body 15K more visually interesting when it is in a completed state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the thousand-point stick challenge. The completed 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. As a result, the completed 1000-point bar completed image TB makes it possible to understand that the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is formed in a completed state in the 1000-point bar union effect performed after the 1000-point bar challenge is completed. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is interesting that the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are moved to the respective second operation positions shown in FIG. 6 (c), and the completed 1000-point bar movable body 15K is noticed. It becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the thousand-point stick challenge. The completed 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. When the 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed and the 1000-point bar challenge is completed, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are displayed from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6A. It is moved to each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moved to. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a three-dimensional effect as if the thousand-point stick displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has popped out to the player side. Become. Therefore, it becomes more interesting to notice the 1000-point stick movable body 15K formed in the completed state, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as described in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the thousand-point stick movable body 15K and the thousand-point stick are obtained by continuously pressing the effect button 63 in the thousand-point stick challenge. It is interesting to notice that the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 of the 1000-point stick completed image TB imitating a stick has been successfully displayed. Further, after the 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and 1000 are moved to the respective second operation positions shown in FIG. 6 (c). It is interesting to notice the point stick left movable body 15L. Since this fun occurs, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display screen of the image display device 7 is set as the first stage of the 1000-point stick challenge by continuously pressing the effect button 63 in the 1000-point stick challenge. The first right partial image TK1 may be stopped and displayed on 7a. Subsequently, by continuously pressing the effect button 63 in the 1000-point stick challenge, the second left on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is set as the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point stick challenge. The partial image TK2 may be stopped and displayed. For example, when the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are successfully displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, the 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed. It will be a success. As a result, in the 1000-point bar challenge performed during the execution of the variation effect, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is successful. .. Therefore, when the display of the 1000-point stick completed image TB is successful, it becomes possible to enhance the fun of noticing the 1000-point stick completed image TB displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the game is enjoyed. It is possible to improve.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display screen of the image display device 7 is set as the first stage of the 1000-point stick challenge by continuously pressing the effect button 63 in the 1000-point stick challenge. The first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed on 7a, and then the second left partial image TK2 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point bar challenge. In some cases. If the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are successfully displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, and the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successfully displayed. , The 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are interlocked, and in a series of operations, from each standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) to each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b). It is moved to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c). As a result, it is moved from each standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) via each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b). Since it is possible to provide the fun of noticing the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L at an early stage, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the 1000-point stick completed image TB is successfully displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point stick challenge, the image display device is used in the 1000-point stick challenge. The time (about 7 seconds, see FIG. 74) shorter than the time (about 7 seconds, see FIG. 74) from the start of the display of the first right partial image TK1 on the display screen 7a of 7 to the successful display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB (see FIG. 74). In about 3 seconds, see FIG. 74), the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are interlocked, and from each standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a), each of them shown in FIG. 6 (b). It is moved to each of the second operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (c) via the first operating position (see FIG. 74). As a result, when the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successfully displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge and the 1000-point bar challenge is completed, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and 1000 are early. The point stick left movable body 15L is moved to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c), and the 1000 point stick movable body 15K formed in the completed state is grasped at an early stage to improve the game entertainment. It becomes possible to make it.

10. Modification Example Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment will be described. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be appropriately combined and configured. Further, the technical features in the above-described embodiment and the following modified examples can be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in the present specification.

In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 corresponds to a “predetermined display unit”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the image display device 7, another image display device that is a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, another image display device may correspond to a "predetermined display unit". Further, the image display device 7 and another image display device may correspond to a "predetermined display unit".

The 1000-point rod movable body 15K in the above embodiment corresponds to the “movable body”. However, it is not limited to this. For example, an upper decorative body formed so as to project from the upper part of the surface of the front frame 51 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided. In this case, the upper decorative body may correspond to the "movable body". Further, the center decorative body 10 may be provided with a movable body other than the 1000-point bar movable body 15K. In this case, another movable body may correspond to the "movable body".

The thousand-point bar movable body 15K (movable body) in the above embodiment is composed of two parts, a thousand-point bar right movable body 15R (partially movable body) and a thousand-point bar left movable body 15L (partially movable body). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the movable body may be composed of three or more partially movable bodies.

The thousand-point bar right movable body 15R in the above embodiment is moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 6A to the first operating position shown in FIG. 6B, and from the first operating position shown in FIG. 6B. It was moved to the second operating position shown in FIG. 6 (c). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R moves from the standby position shown in FIG. 6A to the second operating position shown in FIG. 6C without passing through the first operating position shown in FIG. 6B. It may be moved.

The thousand-point bar right movable body 15L in the above embodiment is moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 6A to the first operating position shown in FIG. 6B, and from the first operating position shown in FIG. 6B. It was moved to the second operating position shown in FIG. 6 (c). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L moves from the standby position shown in FIG. 6A to the second operating position shown in FIG. 6C without passing through the first operating position shown in FIG. 6B. It may be moved.

In the above embodiment, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R are interlocked and movable, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R or the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R may be movable.

In the above embodiment, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L approach each other with almost no gap, so that the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is completed in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When formed into a state, it was designed to form a thousand-point bar (see FIGS. 6 (c) and 77 (d)). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the designs such as the shape and pattern of the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L can be changed as appropriate. Further, the design formed by the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L approaching each other with almost no gap can be appropriately changed. Specifically, for example, the 1000-point stick right movable body 15R is a gimmick representing "the right part of the hero's character's face", and the 1000-point stick left movable body 15L is a gimmick representing "the left part of the hero's character's face". May be. Then, the faces of the main character may be formed by combining these movable bodies.

Further, in the above embodiment, the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L approach each other with almost no gap, so that the thousand-point bar movable body 15K is completed in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It was formed in a state of being. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is not necessary for the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L to approach each other with almost no gap, and the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L have a certain gap. By approaching with, the thousand-point bar movable body 15K may be formed in a completed state in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In the above embodiment, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R is provided above the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L is provided below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (See FIGS. 1 and 6 (a)). However, it is not limited to this. The arrangement positions of the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R may be provided on the right side of the center decoration body 10, and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L may be provided on the left side of the center decoration body 10.

In the above embodiment, the thousand-point bar completed image TB (movable body image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the first right partial image TK1 (partially movable body image) and the second left partial image TK2. It was composed of two (partially movable body image). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the movable body image may be composed of three or more partially movable body images.

In the above embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the thousand-point bar completed image TB is successfully (completed) displayed. It was. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB may be successful (completed) by stopping and displaying three or more partially movable body images. Further, the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB may be successful (completed) without stopping and displaying all of the partially movable body images.

In the above embodiment, about 1 second has passed since the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB was successful (completed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the same time as the 1000-point bar challenge was completed, the 1000-point bar was united. The effect was executed, and the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L approached each other with almost no gap, so that the 1000-point bar movable body 15K was formed in a completed state (see FIG. 74). However, it is not limited to this. For example, at the same time that the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is completed (successful) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 1000-point bar challenge is completed, the 1000-point bar combination effect is executed, and the 1000-point bar right. By approaching the movable body 15R and the left movable body 15L of the 1000-point bar with almost no gap, the movable body 15K of the 1000-point bar may be formed in a completed state. In addition, the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successfully (completed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a time longer than about 1 second has elapsed, and at the same time as the 1000-point bar challenge is completed, 1000 points are obtained. The rod uniting effect is executed, and the 1000-point rod right movable body 15R and the 1000-point rod left movable body 15L approach each other with almost no gap, so that the 1000-point rod movable body 15K may be formed in a completed state.

By the time the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the above embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 is on the right outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. From the side, go straight toward the center of the display screen 7a little by little, and the entire first right partial image TK1 is gradually displayed, the entire first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed, and then the second left portion. The image TK2 goes straight from the left outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a little by little, and the entire second left partial image TK2 is gradually displayed, and the second left partial image is displayed. The fact that the entire TK2 was stopped and displayed corresponded to the "method of appearance of the partially movable body image until the movable body image was completed". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an example corresponding to the "method of appearance of the partially movable body image until the movable body image is completed" can be appropriately changed. However, "the appearance method of the partially movable body image until the movable body image is completed" and "the appearance method of the partially movable body until the movable body is formed in the completed state" are different. For example, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are displayed on the image display device 7 by the time the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. From the state not displayed on the screen 7a, the first right partial image TK1 is displayed in the first stage, and then the second left partial image TK2 is displayed in the final stage (second stage). It may correspond to "the appearance method of the partially movable body image until the body image is completed". Further, by the time the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are displayed on the image display device 7. The fact that the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where they are not displayed on the screen 7a is "a part until the movable body image is completed. It may correspond to "the appearance method of the movable body image".

Further, the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L in the above embodiment are linearly arranged from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6A to the respective first operating positions shown in FIG. 6B. It was moved (straight ahead) to a curve from each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) in a clockwise arc. This corresponds to "a method of appearance of a partially movable body until the movable body is formed in a completed state". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an example corresponding to "a method of appearance of a partially movable body until the movable body is formed in a completed state" can be appropriately changed. However, "the appearance method of the partially movable body image until the movable body image is completed" and "the appearance method of the partially movable body until the movable body is formed in the completed state" are different. For example, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L display the image display device 7 from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a) to the respective second operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (c). Moving (straight ahead) linearly downward and upward along the screen 7a may correspond to "a method of appearance of a partially movable body until the movable body is formed in a completed state".

By the time the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the above embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 is on the right outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The entire first right partial image TK1 is gradually displayed by going straight toward the center of the display screen 7a from the side, the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed, and the second left partial image TK2. Is gradually going straight from the left outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a, and the entire second left partial image TK2 is gradually displayed, and the second left partial image TK2 is displayed. The stop display corresponded to "the partially movable body image is linearly moved and displayed". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first right partial image TK1 advances linearly from the right outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a, or the image. By repeating returning linearly to the right outside the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the entire first right partial image TK1 is gradually displayed, and the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed. That is, the second left partial image TK2 advances linearly from the left outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a, or the right outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By repeating returning linearly toward the direction, the entire second left partial image TK2 is gradually displayed, and the second left partial image TK2 is stopped and displayed, which is the "partially movable body image". Is linearly moved and displayed. ”

Further, in the thousand-point bar challenge in the above embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 gradually goes straight from the right outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the entire first right partial image TK1 was gradually displayed and stopped. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first right partial image TK1 is linear from a direction other than the right outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, upward, upper right, etc.) toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By gradually advancing to, the entire first right partial image TK1 may be gradually displayed, and the first right partial image TK1 may be stopped and displayed.

Further, in the thousand-point bar challenge in the above embodiment, the second left partial image TK2 is slightly linearly moved from the left outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As the process progressed step by step, the entire second left partial image TK2 was gradually displayed and stopped. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the second left partial image TK2 is slightly linearly toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from a direction other than the left side (downward, upper left, etc.) outside the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By proceeding step by step, the entire second left partial image TK2 may be gradually displayed, and the second left partial image TK2 may be stopped and displayed.

In the above embodiment, the 1000-point stick challenge performed during the execution of the variable effect corresponds to the "operation effect", but is not limited to this. For example, a 1000-point stick challenge may be performed during the execution of the jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game. During the execution of the jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game, the 1000-point stick challenge may correspond to the "operation effect". In this case, the 1000-point bar challenge is performed during the execution of the jackpot effect, the 1000-point bar completed image TB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is formed in a completed state. After that, for example, a promotion effect may be performed to notify that a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is being executed.

The thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L in the above embodiment arc from their respective first operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (b) to their respective second operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (c). Moving clockwise as if drawing corresponded to "moving a partially movable body in a curve". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L in the above embodiment are shown in FIG. 6A from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6C. Moving clockwise to each of the second operating positions shown in (1) in an arc may correspond to "moving the partially movable body in a curve". Further, the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L in the above embodiment are from the respective first operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (b) to the respective second operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (c). Moving clockwise in an arc may correspond to "moving a partially movable body in a curve".

In the 1000-point bar challenge of the above embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successfully displayed ( When it comes to completion), the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are linear from their respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a) to their respective first operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (b). By moving to, and moving from each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) in a curve in a clockwise arc. The 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L approach each other with almost no gap, whereby the 1000-point bar movable body 15K is formed in a completed state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the thousand-point bar challenge of the above embodiment, the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed without displaying the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed) in 7a, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are shown in FIG. 6A from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a). It is linearly moved to each first operation position shown in b), and counterclockwise from each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c). The thousand-point rod movable body 15K may be formed in a completed state by being moved in a curved line so as to draw an arc. Further, when the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are simply displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 instead of the stop display on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the thousand-point bar completed image is displayed. The display of TB was successful (completed), and the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L were each in the first operation shown in FIG. 6 (b) from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a). Move linearly to the position, and move from each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) in a curve so as to draw an arc clockwise. By doing so, the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L may approach each other with almost no gap, so that the 1000-point bar movable body 15K may be formed in a completed state.

In the above embodiment, the second operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (c) are such that the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , Corresponds to the "predetermined operating position". However, it is not limited to this. The second operating positions of the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are not limited to the second operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (c), and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 If it is on the front side, it can be changed as appropriate.

The effect button 63 in the above embodiment corresponds to the "operation means". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with another input device (for example, another effect button) that can be pressed and operated other than the effect button 63. In this case, another input device may correspond to the "operating means". Further, the effect button 63 and other input devices may correspond to "operation means".

The thousand-point stick challenge in the above embodiment is a button continuous operation promotion effect that prompts the player to continuously press the effect button 63, but is not limited to this. For example, the 1000-point stick challenge may be a button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 once. Further, the 1000-point stick challenge may be a button operation promotion effect that encourages the player to continue the one-time pressing operation of the effect button 63 (that is, long press).

In the above embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 (partially movable body image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in two stages (predetermined stages), which is the final stage in the thousand-point bar challenge (operation effect). And the second left partial image TK2 (partially movable body image) are stopped and displayed, so that the thousand-point bar completed image TB (movable body image) is successfully displayed (see FIG. 77 (b)). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the final stage may be three or more stages. Specifically, each of the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in three stages of the 1000-point bar challenge, so that the 1000-point bar completed image The display of TB may be successful.

In the above embodiment, in the second stage, which is the final stage in the 1000-point bar challenge, the first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second left partial image is displayed. The fact that TK2 was stopped and displayed corresponded to "each of the plurality of partially movable body images was displayed at a predetermined stage". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the display of the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is started in the first stage of the thousand-point stick challenge, and the image is displayed in the second stage of the thousand-point stick challenge. The fact that the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 are stopped and displayed corresponds to "each of the plurality of partially movable body images is displayed at a predetermined stage". You may.

In the above embodiment, the display of the first right partial image TK1 is successful because the entire first right partial image TK1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second left partial image TK2 is displayed. The display of the second left partial image TK2 was successful because the entire display was stopped. Then, the display of the 1000-point stick completed image TB was successful. However, it is not limited to this. For example, by displaying a part of the first right partial image TK1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the first right partial image TK1 is successful, and a part of the second left partial image TK2 is displayed. By being displayed, the display of the second left partial image TK2 may be successful. Then, the display of the 1000-point stick completed image TB may be successful.

In the above embodiment, the first right partial image TK1 (partially movable body image) and the second left partial image TK2 (partial) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display unit) in the thousand-point bar challenge (operation effect). Since the display of the movable body image) was successful, the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB (movable body image) was successful. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the display of the movable body image may be successful by displaying three or more partially movable body images on the display unit in the operation effect. Further, the display of the movable body image may be successful by displaying the movable body image on the display unit in the operation effect.

In the 1000-point bar challenge (operation effect) in the above embodiment, the image display device 7 (display unit) is set as the first stage of the 1000-point bar challenge by continuously pressing the effect button 63 (operation means). The first right partial image TK1 (partially movable body image) is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the above, and the second left partial image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the final stage (second stage) of the 1000-point stick challenge. TK2 (partially movable body image) was stopped and displayed. When the first right partial image TK1 and the second left partial image TK2 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIG. 77B), a thousand points on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are displayed. The display of the completed bar image TB was successful (see FIG. 77 (c)). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the partially movable body image may be displayed in three or more stages on the display unit based on the operation of the operation means in the operation effect. For example, when three partially movable body images can be displayed, the partially movable body image may be displayed in the first stage, and the partially movable body image may be displayed in the second stage, and finally. A partially movable body image may be displayed at the third stage (third stage). In this case, the display of the movable body image may be successful by displaying the three partially movable body images.

The standby positions (predetermined standby) shown in FIG. 6 (a) are obtained without the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R (movable body) and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L (movable body) being completely stopped. Position) ⇒ Each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) ⇒ A constant operation moved in the order of each second operation position (predetermined operation position) shown in FIG. 6 (c) is a "series operation". Corresponds to. However, it is not limited to this. Here, the "series of movements" refers to a certain movement in which the movable body may appear to the player to move from a predetermined standby position to a predetermined movement position without being completely stopped. It may mean something. For example, when the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are moved from their respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a) to their respective first operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (b), they are temporarily moved. For example, temporarily stop for about 1 second, and after the temporary stop, move from each first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) to each second operation position (predetermined operation position) shown in FIG. 6 (c). It may be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player appear that the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L are moved without being completely stopped.

In the above embodiment, when the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, the first right partial image TK1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It took about 7 seconds from the start of the display to the successful (completion) display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB (see FIG. 74). However, it is not limited to this. When the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, the display of the first right partial image TK1 is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The time required for the display of the completed image TB of the thousand-point stick to be successful (completed) can be changed as appropriate. However, after the movement of the 1000-point bar right movable body 15R and the 1000-point bar left movable body 15L from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a) is started, the second operating positions shown in FIG. 6 (c) are respectively. It shall be longer than the time it takes to move to.

In the above embodiment, when the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, the first right partial image TK1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and thousand-point bar left movable than the time (about 7 seconds, see Fig. 74) from the start of display to the successful (completion) display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB. The time (about 3 seconds, FIG. 74) from the start of movement of the body 15L from each standby position shown in FIG. 6 (a) to the movement to each second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c). See) was short. However, it is not limited to this. For example, after the movement of the thousand-point bar right movable body 15R and the thousand-point bar left movable body 15L from the respective standby positions shown in FIG. 6 (a) is started, the second operation positions shown in FIG. The time it takes to move to can be changed as appropriate. However, if the display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successful on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the 1000-point bar challenge, the display of the first right partial image TK1 is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is set to be shorter than the time (about 7 seconds, see FIG. 74) from the completion to the successful (completion) display of the 1000-point bar completed image TB.

In the above embodiment, the variation effect executed based on the SPSP jackpot variation (special figure variation pattern "P02", see FIG. 12) or the SPSP loss variation (special figure variation pattern "P07", see FIG. 12) is 1,000. When the point-point bar challenge was performed and then the 1000-point bar combination production was performed, the structure developed into SPSP reach after the 1000-point bar combination production was completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when a 1000-point bar challenge is performed in a variable effect and then a 1000-point bar combination effect is performed, the configuration may not develop into SPSP reach after the 1000-point bar combination effect is completed. Specifically, after the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with the reach loss eyes (for example, "323") that suggest a loss once during the execution of the fluctuation production, a thousand-point stick challenge is performed as a revival production. It may be a possible configuration. In this case, in the case of the variation effect executed based on the jackpot variation, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with the reach loss eye that suggests the loss once during the execution of the variation effect, and then the revival effect is performed. As a result, the 1000-point bar challenge is performed, and the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successfully displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the 1000-point bar union effect is executed after the 1000-point bar challenge is completed. You can do it. However, in the case of a variation effect executed based on the loss variation, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed as a revival effect with a reach loss eye that suggests a loss once during the execution of the variation effect. When the 1000-point bar challenge is performed, the first right partial image TK1 may be stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but the 1000-point bar is completed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display of the image TB is not successful. As a result, the 1000-point stick challenge is given to the player as the last chance in the variable production, and the 1000-point stick completed image TB is successfully displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 only in the variable production based on the jackpot fluctuation. By doing so, if the 1000-point stick combination production is executed after the end of the 1000-point stick challenge, it will be possible to strongly stimulate the emotions of the player who is depressed by seeing the reach loss eyes that suggest the loss, and the game production. It becomes possible to entertain.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the player reaches the reach during the execution of the variable effect, the 1000-point stick challenge can be performed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the 1000-point stick challenge may be performed at a time other than the reach performed during the execution of the variation effect.

In the present embodiment, after the 1000-point bar challenge performed during the execution of the variable effect, the 1000-point bar combination effect may be performed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, there may be a configuration in which only the 1000-point bar combination effect is performed without performing the 1000-point bar challenge during the execution of the variable effect.

In the above-described embodiment, the 1000-point bar combination effect is that the 1000-point bar completed image TB is successfully displayed (completed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 1000-point bar challenge is successful, and the 1000-point bar challenge is successful. It was a production using a movable uniting that makes it possible to grasp that it will develop into SPSP reach after the execution of the rod uniting effect. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the thousand-point bar combination effect, the display of the thousand-point bar completed image TB is successful (completed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player is made aware that the thousand-point bar challenge is successful. It may be a production that can be done. In addition, the 1000-point stick combination effect was that the 1000-point stick completed image TB was successfully displayed (completed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the 1000-point stick challenge was successful, and a special drawing lottery. It may be an effect that makes it possible to grasp that the result is a hit.

In the above embodiment, the 9R time-saving jackpot and the 10R time-saving small hit C (second hit) are in a time-saving state and a high base state after the execution of the jackpot game as compared with the 10R normal small hit (first hit). The second hit was more advantageous to the player than the first hit because it would be controlled. However, it is not limited to this. For example, since the second hit has more rounds in the jackpot game to be executed than the first hit, the second hit may be more advantageous to the player than the first hit. In addition, the second hit has a larger number of rounds in the executed jackpot game than the first hit, and is controlled to a shorter time state and a higher base state after the executed jackpot game is completed. , The second hit may be more advantageous to the player than the first hit.

In the above embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the result of the lottery performed based on one second special figure hold saved at the end of the previous time saving state is 10R normal small hit, 9R time saving big hit, or 10R. Regardless of the time saving small hit C, in the variable effect executed based on the hit, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting winning are After being temporarily stopped with a symbol (in this form, any of "2", "4", "6", and "8") indicating the possibility of winning the 10R normal small hit, the final symbol promotion effect Was executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the non-time saving state, the result of the lottery performed based on one second special figure hold saved at the end of the previous time saving state is executed based on the 9R time saving big hit or the 10R time saving small hit C. In the variable effect to be performed, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting winning are the time-saving symbols indicating the possibility of winning the 10R normal small hit (in this embodiment, "2". , "4", "6", "8"), and then the final symbol promotion effect may be executed.

In the above embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting winning are the time-saving symbols suggesting that the 10R normal small hit is won (in this embodiment, "2", A temporary stop was displayed at any of "4", "6", and "8"). However, it is not limited to this. For example, as an effect suggesting that the 10R normal small hit has been won, a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, a frame lamp 66 or a lower right lamp 69 are specified. An effect of emitting light in a light emitting mode, a hold icon notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, or the like may be executed.

The final symbol promotion effect in the above embodiment is a promotion effect having the effect modes shown in FIGS. 70 (a), 70 (b), 73 (a), and 73 (b). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the final symbol promotion effect including the effect modes other than those shown in FIGS. 70 (a), 70 (b), 73 (a), and 73 (b) may be executed.

In the non-time saving state in the above embodiment, the stop suggesting winning in the variable effect based on the result of the lottery performed based on the one second special figure hold saved at the end of the previous time saving state. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the aspect (doublet) have no time saving symbols indicating the possibility of winning the 10R normal small hit (in this embodiment, "2", "4", "6", "8". After being displayed as a temporary stop, the final symbol promotion effect was executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the upper limit storage number of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is 2 or more, a lottery is performed based on two or more second special figure reservations saved at the end of the previous time saving state. In all the variable effects based on the result of, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the symbols without time reduction indicating the possibility of winning the 10R normal small hit (in this embodiment, "2", "4", "6" , "8"), the final symbol promotion effect may be executed when the temporary stop is displayed.

After the temporary stop is displayed in the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting winning in the variable effect based on the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 in the time saving state of the above embodiment, the final symbol An effect different from the effect of the promotion effect (the effect shown in FIG. 70 (a), the effect shown in FIG. 70 (b), the effect shown in FIG. 73 (a), the effect shown in FIG. 73 (b)). The time-saving symbol promotion effect of the aspect (the effect mode shown in FIG. 63 (a) and the effect mode shown in FIG. 67 (a)) was executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode of the time-saving symbol promotion effect is the effect mode of the final symbol promotion effect (the effect mode shown in FIG. 70 (a), the effect mode shown in FIG. 70 (b), the effect mode shown in FIG. 73 (a), and the figure. A part (for example, the display mode of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) may be the same as long as the effect mode is not the same as the effect mode shown in 73 (b).

Further, in the variable effect based on the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 in the time saving state of the above embodiment, after the temporary stop is displayed by the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting winning. , Time saving symbol promotion production was executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, after the temporary stop is displayed with the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting winning in the variable effect based on the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 in the time saving state, the temporary stop is displayed. A promotion effect is executed to notify whether or not the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed to the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) that suggests a more advantageous hit for the player. It does not have to be.

In the above embodiment, if a prize is won in the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation, and the upper limit storage number of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is 1. Was there. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit storage number of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b may be 2 or more. Further, if the prize is won in the second starting port 21, the configuration may not be stored as the second special drawing hold.

In the above embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are 10R in the variable effect based on the result of the lottery performed based on the one second special figure hold saved at the end of the previous time saving state. After a temporary stop is displayed with a symbol with no time reduction (in this form, any of "2", "4", "6", and "8") indicating the possibility of winning a small hit, the final symbol promotion effect is displayed. It has been executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the upper limit storage number of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b is 2 or more, the last of the two or more second special figure holdings saved at the end of the previous time saving state is saved. It is possible that the production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R won the 10R normal small hit in the variable production based on the result of the lottery based on the 2nd special figure reservation that was saved before the 2nd special figure reservation. The final symbol promotion effect is not executed after the temporary stop is displayed with the symbol with no time reduction (in this form, any of "2", "4", "6", and "8"), but it is saved at the end. In the variable effect based on the result of the lottery performed based on the second special figure hold, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may have won the 10R normal small hit (in this embodiment). , "2", "4", "6", "8"), and then the final symbol promotion effect may be executed. As a result, it is possible that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R won the 10R normal small hit in the variable effect based on the result of the lottery performed based on the second special figure hold that was saved at the end. It is possible to provide the player with an effect that gives the player the last chance when the temporary stop is displayed with the symbol without time reduction. Therefore, I am very disappointed to see the production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed with no time saving symbol at the final chance of the lottery of special figure 2 while there is a possibility of returning to left-handed. The final symbol promotion effect makes it possible for the player to have a desire to be promoted to a symbol with a reduced time.

In the above embodiment, when the time saving symbol promotion effect is executed, or the final symbol promotion effect is executed, and there is a symbol promotion of the effect symbol (from the symbol without time reduction to the symbol with time reduction), there is a time reduction on the display screen 7a. In the symbols, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 were definitively stopped and displayed, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were definitively stopped and displayed (FIGS. 63 (e), 67 (c), and 70 (e). ), FIG. 73 (e)). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the time-saving symbol promotion effect is executed, or the final symbol promotion effect is executed, and there is a symbol promotion of the effect symbol (from a symbol without time reduction to a symbol with time reduction), the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are deterministic. However, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may not be definitively stopped and displayed, and the effect of notifying that the hit has been made may be executed.

In the above embodiment, the V icon image (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) displayed on the display screen 7a corresponds to the "hit suggestion display". However, it is not limited to this. For example, a player may be elected by the special figure 2 lottery, and a big hit game (a big hit game by passing V based on the small hit winning or a big hit game based on the big hit winning of the special figure 2 lottery) can be executed once. Any effect image that can be suggested and is displayed on the display screen 7a can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the display screen 7a is won by the lottery of special figure 2, and the big hit game (big hit game by passing V based on small hit winning or big hit game based on big hit winning of special figure 2 lottery) is executed once. A character image or the like that can suggest that it can be displayed may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the V icon images (first V icon image AC1 and second V icon image AC2) displayed on the display screen 7a are displayed during the execution of the variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the V icon image (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the jackpot effect may be displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a maximum storage number of "1", so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a double loop (a jackpot including the first hit when a time-saving symbol is won in the lottery of special figure 1). A game machine in which the number of consecutive chans is at least 3 times). As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect in the time saving state, and the non-time saving state. One of the first V icon images AC1 may be displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect in the state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is configured as a three-loop pachinko game machine with the upper limit storage number of the second special figure hold being "2", the display screen 7a is displayed during the execution of the variation effect in the time saving state. The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC1 and the second V icon are displayed on the display screen 7a when the first V icon image AC1, the second V icon image AC2, and the third V icon image AC3 are displayed, and during the execution of the variation effect in the non-time saving state. One of the first V icon images AC1 may be displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the image AC2 and the variation effect in the time saving state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the V icon images (first V icon image AC1 and second V icon image AC2) are displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the V icon image (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) may be displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game.

In the above embodiment, only the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2, or the first V icon image AC1 on the display screen 7a when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed during the execution of the variable effect. The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 on the display screen 7a were displayed larger than the above, before the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R was started during the execution of the variation effect. .. Further, the effect is produced during the execution of the variation effect rather than the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 on the display screen 7a before the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started during the execution of the variation effect. Only the first V icon image AC1 on the display screen 7a before the variable display of the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R was started was displayed larger. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2 displayed on the display screen 7a before the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started during the execution of the variation effect, and the variation effect is being executed. The size of the first V icon image AC1 displayed on the display screen 7a before the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started may be the same.

In the above embodiment, the V icon image (V icon image) is before the start of the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R than when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed during the execution of the variable effect. The first V icon image AC1 and the second V icon image AC2) may be displayed in a large size (FIGS. 61 (c), 61 (d), 65 (c), 65 (d), 68 (FIG. 61), FIG. b), FIG. 68 (c), FIG. 71 (b), FIG. 71 (c)). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the V icon image (1st V icon image AC1, 2nd V icon image AC2) can be displayed on the display screen 7a during the execution of the jackpot effect, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not variablely displayed. The V icon image (1st V icon image AC1, 2nd V icon image AC2) is larger on the display screen 7a when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed during the execution of the variable effect. It may be displayed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“2”, so-called reach eyes) on the display screen 7a, and the reach is established. When the normal reach is performed, the display of the V icon images (first V icon image AC1 and second V icon image AC2) on the display screen 7a is completed (FIGS. 61 (e), 65 (e), 68 (FIG. 68). d), see FIG. 71 (d)). However, it is not limited to this. For example, on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“2”, so-called reach eyes), and even if the reach is established, they are displayed on the display screen 7a. The V icon image (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) may continue to be displayed small below the display screen 7a so as not to interfere with the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, even during SP reach, the V icon image (1st V icon image AC1, 2nd V icon) is below the display screen 7a so as not to interfere with the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a. The image AC2) may continue to be displayed small.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“2”, so-called reach eye) on the display screen 7a, the reach is established. , The display of the V icon image (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) on the display screen 7a may be terminated.

In the above embodiment, during the execution of the variation effect based on the result of the lottery of the special figure 2, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped in the same stop mode (“2”, so-called reach eyes) on the display screen 7a. When the temporary stop is displayed and the reach is established and the normal reach is reached, the display of the V icon image (1st V icon image AC1 and 2nd V icon image AC2) on the display screen 7a disappears and the SP reach (for example, battle reach) is changed. The V icon image (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) was not displayed on the display screen 7a even when the operation was performed (FIGS. 61 (e), 62, 65 (e), FIG. 66, FIG. 68 (d), FIG. 69, FIG. 71 (d), FIG. 72). However, it is not limited to this. For example, during the execution of the variable effect based on the result of the lottery of the special figure 2, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“2”, so-called reach eye) on the display screen 7a. Then, when the reach is established and the V icon image (1st V icon image AC1 and 2nd V icon image AC2) on the display screen 7a continues to be displayed even in the normal reach and develops into the SP reach (for example, battle reach), it is displayed. The display of the V icon image (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) on the screen 7a may be finished and disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the above embodiment, when the normal reach is developed during the execution of the variation effect based on the result of the lottery of the special figure 2, the display of the V icon image (first V icon image AC1 and second V icon image AC2) on the display screen 7a disappears. , The V icon image (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) was not displayed on the display screen 7a even when SP reach (for example, battle reach) was performed (FIG. 61 (e), 62, 65 (e), 66, 68 (d), 69, 71 (d), 72). However, it is not limited to this. For example, during the execution of the variable effect based on the result of the lottery of Special Figure 2, a specific effect may be performed before the development to normal reach, and by the time the specific effect is performed, V on the display screen 7a The display of the icon image (first V icon image AC1 and second V icon image AC2) may disappear. Here, the specific effect may be, for example, a fan effect that encourages whether or not the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“2”, so-called reach eye). As a result, the V icon displayed on the display screen 7a is a fanning effect that encourages whether or not the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode (“2”, so-called reach eye). The images (first V icon image AC1 and second V icon image AC2) make it possible to prevent the player from being invisible.

In the above embodiment, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner during the execution of the variable effect, the display screen 7a is used to win the lottery of the special figure 2 and once. The first V icon image AC1 suggesting that the jackpot game can be executed, and the second V icon image AC2 suggesting that one jackpot game can be executed by winning the lottery of the next special figure 2 are displayed. In some cases (see FIGS. 61 (d) and 61 (d)). When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed during the execution of the variable effect, the black first V icon image AC1 and the white second V icon image AC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. It was displayed. The first V icon image AC1 is not limited to the second V icon image AC2 as long as it is easier for the player to confirm. For example, the second V icon image AC2 may be displayed darker than the first V icon image AC1 on the display screen 7a, and the first V icon image AC1 may be displayed brighter than the second V icon image AC2. As a result, by confirming the first V icon image AC1 that is brightly displayed on the display screen 7a, the first V icon image AC1 can be won in the lottery of this special figure 2 and the jackpot game can be executed. It becomes easy to understand that it corresponds to.

In the above embodiment, after the temporary stop is displayed by the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) that suggests winning in the variable effect based on the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 in the time saving state, the time saving symbol The promotion effect was always executed (see FIGS. 63 (a) and 67 (a)). However, it is not limited to this. For example, after the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) that suggests winning in the variable effect based on the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 in the time-saving state are temporarily stopped, the time-saving symbol promotion effect May be executed, and the time saving symbol promotion effect may not be executed.

In the above embodiment, the time is shortened after the temporary stop is displayed by the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) that suggests winning in the variable effect based on the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state. The symbol promotion effect was always executed (see FIGS. 70 (a), 70 (b), 73 (a), and 73 (b)). However, it is not limited to this. For example, after being temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting winning in the variable effect based on the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state, the final symbol is promoted. There may be a case where the effect is executed and a case where the final symbol promotion effect is not executed.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the result of the lottery performed based on the one second special figure hold saved at the end of the previous time saving state is 10R normal small hit, 9R time saving big hit, Or, in any of the 10R time-saving small hits C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constituting the stop mode (doublet) suggesting winning in the variable effect executed based on the hit. Is the final symbol after being temporarily stopped with a symbol without time reduction (in this embodiment, any of "2", "4", "6", and "8") indicating the possibility of winning the 10R normal small hit. The promotion production was carried out. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state, the result of the lottery performed based on the second special figure hold is executed based on the time-saving hit (for example, 9R time-saving jackpot) to suggest winning. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that make up the stop mode (doublet) are symbols with time reduction (in this embodiment, any one of "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9"). There may be a case where the temporary stop display is displayed and the time saving symbol promotion effect or the final symbol promotion effect is not executed, and the time saving symbol is definitively stopped and displayed.

In the above embodiment, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed during the execution of the variable effect, the V icon image (1st V icon image AC1, 2nd V icon image AC2) displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed. ) Is displayed in a reduced size (see FIGS. 61 (d), 65 (d), 68 (c), and 71 (c)). However, it is not limited to this. For example, during the execution of the variation effect, the V icon images (first V icon image AC1, second V icon image AC2) displayed on the display screen 7a before the variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed. It may be reduced and displayed.

In the above embodiment, the upper limit storage number of the second special figure hold is set to "1", but it may be set to 2 or more. For example, if the upper limit memory number is "2", the number of consecutive chans of big hits including the first hit when winning with a time-saving symbol in the lottery of special figure 1 is at least 4 times. A game machine) can be configured. In addition, if the upper limit memory number is "3", the number of consecutive chans of big hits including the first hit when winning with a time-saving symbol in the lottery of special figure 1 is at least 5 times. A game machine) can be configured. In addition, if the upper limit memory number is "4", the number of consecutive chans of big hits including the first hit when winning with a time-saving symbol in the lottery of special figure 1 is at least 6 times. A game machine) can be configured.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a 1-type and 2-type mixer, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be a gaming machine in which the transition to the high probability state is determined based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol, or the so-called V probability machine (high probability based on the passage of a specific area (V area) in the big winning opening). It may be a game machine that controls the state). Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured as a gaming machine (so-called probabilistic loop type gaming machine) in which control to the high probability state continues until the start of the next jackpot game once it is controlled to the high probability state. , A so-called ST machine (a gaming machine that cuts the number of probable changes) may be configured. Further, it may be configured as a splash-type game machine. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the number of consecutive high-probability states after the end of the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, two times) and then shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the executed jackpot game. (So-called probability change limiter machine) may be used. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured such that the number of consecutive jackpot games in the high-probability state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, two times) and then shifts to the low-probability state after the execution of the jackpot game is completed. good. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the number of consecutive time-saving states after the end of the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, once) and then shifts to the non-time-saving state after the end of the executed jackpot game ( It may be a so-called time-saving limiter machine). Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may have a configuration in which the number of consecutive jackpot games in the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, once), and after the end of the subsequent jackpot games executed, the pachinko game machine 1 shifts to the non-time-saving state. .. That is, the invention shown in the present specification can be suitably adopted for a game machine having various game characteristics regardless of the game nature of the game machine.

In each of the above modes, after being controlled to the time saving state, the driving promotion image 7Y in the reduced display mode is displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, but the driving promotion image 7Y in the reduced display mode is displayed. You may not display it. That is, in the electric chew driving notification effect, only the driving promotion image 7X in the normal display mode may be displayed. In this case, since the driving promotion image 7Y in the reduced display mode is not displayed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is rather confused as to whether or not the driving to the electric chew 22 is continued. Is. As a specific control process, it is sufficient not to execute the process related to the electric chew driving reduction flag. That is, in the first embodiment, the processes of steps S4508 and S4513 are not executed in the start winning command analysis process (S4404) shown in FIG. 46, and steps S5103 and step S5103 and the electric chew driving effect process (S4302) shown in FIG. Configure not to perform step S5106.

In addition, when the upper limit storage number of the second special figure hold is set to 3 or more, even if the driving promotion image displayed on the display screen 7a is gradually reduced based on the entry into the second starting port 21. good. For example, when the upper limit storage number of the second special figure hold is set to "3", the game ball is set to the second start port when the time is controlled and there is no second special figure hold and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is not displayed. When the ball enters 21, the driving promotion image 7X in the normal display mode is displayed. Then, when one number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is accumulated during the variable display of the special figure 2, the driving promotion image (the driving promotion image 7Y shown in FIG. 54 (b)) of the first reduced display mode is displayed. When two reserved balls are accumulated during the variable display of FIG. 2, the driving promotion image (the driving promotion image smaller than the driving promotion image 7Y) of the second reduced display mode may be displayed. .. This makes it easier for the player to know that the end of driving into the electric chew 22 is gradually approaching.

Further, in the first embodiment, the VV lamp 68 capable of lighting one or two letters V is provided, but other lamps may be used. For example, when the upper limit storage number of the second special figure hold is set to "3", a VVVV lamp capable of lighting 1 to 4 letters V may be used. That is, a lamp capable of lighting the letter V up to the number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit storage number of the second special figure hold may be used. Further, in the VV lamp 68 and the VVV lamp 68A, the lamps are arranged in the left-right direction, but they may be arranged in the vertical direction, the diagonally upper right direction, and the diagonally lower right direction. Further, each lamp may be arranged irregularly, and the arrangement of each lamp can be changed as appropriate. Then, each lamp was turned on so as to increase in order from left to right, but the order of lighting can be changed as appropriate, and even if the lamps are turned on in order from right to left. good. Furthermore, the characters, figures, symbols, etc. formed by lighting each lamp are not limited to "V", and can be appropriately changed as long as they suggest a situation in which a jackpot game can be executed. For example, "★ , Etc. may be used. Further, the light emitting mode of the VV lamp 68 and the lower right lamp 69 may be a light emitting mode in which a part of the lamp is lit or a flashing light emitting mode, and the emission color and the like can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the above embodiment, one or two letters V are displayed on the display screen 7a based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21, but the number of Vs to be displayed can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the upper limit storage number of the second special figure hold is set to "3", 1 to 4 letters V may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, although a plurality of V characters are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, they may be displayed side by side in the vertical direction, the diagonally upper right direction, and the diagonally lower right direction. Further, each V character may be displayed irregularly, and the display position of the V character can be changed as appropriate. Then, the letters of each V are displayed so as to increase in order from the left to the right, but the display order can be changed as appropriate, and the characters are displayed so as to increase in order from the right to the left. Is also good. Further, the character, figure, symbol, etc. of V displayed on the display screen 7a is not limited to "V", and can be appropriately changed as long as it suggests a situation in which the jackpot game can be executed. ★ ”etc. may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the game state after the big hit game is controlled to the time saving state, the lower right lamp 69 emits light in a predetermined light emitting color (for example, white) as the first aspect, and the variation display of FIG. When the second special figure hold was accumulated by the upper limit storage number, the light was not emitted as the second mode. However, the lower right lamp 69 may emit light in yellow, which is more conspicuous than white, for example, as the second aspect when the second special figure hold is accumulated by the upper limit storage number during the fluctuation display of special figure 2. .. In this case, when the lower right lamp 69 emits yellow light, the most advantageous situation for the player (the situation where the second special figure hold is accumulated by the upper limit memory number during the variable display of special figure 2) is created. It is possible to indirectly show that. Although the lower right lamp 69 was arranged directly below the electric chew 22, it may be arranged directly above or to the right of the electric chew 22, and the arrangement position can be changed as appropriate. When the electric chew 22 is arranged in the left game area 3A, it is preferable to arrange the board lamp (light emitting means) in the left game area 3A near the electric chew 22.

Further, in the above embodiment, when a small hit is won in the winning / failing determination (S1002) based on the entry into the second starting opening 21, the game ball winning the second major winning opening 35 is not related to the winning timing. Although the opening pattern is set so as to pass through the specific area 39 (see FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c)), it does not pass through the specific area 39 depending on the winning timing of the game ball that has won the second major winning opening 35. You may set the opening pattern so that it may happen. In this case, it is difficult to pass the game ball through the specific area 39 in the high base state, and the speed at which the next jackpot is assigned may be slower than in each of the above-described forms, but the game machine as a whole is the second. It is possible to prevent the passing rate (V passing rate) of the game ball winning the large winning opening 35 into the specific area 39 from becoming unreasonably high.

Further, in the above embodiment, when suggesting a situation in which the jackpot game can be executed once in the high base state, the VV lamp 68 is made to emit light in the first light emitting mode, and the effect image 6A is displayed on the display screen 7a. , The light emission of the VV lamp 68 and the display of the display screen 7a may be used. Further, when suggesting a situation in which the jackpot game can be executed twice in the high base state, the VV lamp 68 is made to emit light in the second light emitting mode, and the effect image 6B is displayed on the display screen 7a. Either one of the light emission and the display of the display screen 7a may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the small win can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, but the winning probability of the small win in the lottery of the first special symbol may be set to "0". In this case, in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) shown in FIG. 26, the processes from steps S1107 to S1110 are not performed.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the small hits that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "10R time saving small hit A" that cannot pass V and "10R time saving small hit B" that can pass V are provided. However, it may be only a small hit that cannot pass through V.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first big winning opening 30 is opened in the big hit game, and the second big winning opening 35 is opened in the small hit game. On the other hand, at least a part of the rounds of the jackpot game may have a round in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened. In this case, the jackpot game is configured so that the jackpot game is not further executed by passing V during the execution of the jackpot game.

Further, in the above embodiment, four random numbers such as a jackpot random number are acquired as random numbers (numerical information) acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, but one random number. May be obtained and based on the random number, whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit or the small hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of the fluctuation pattern may be determined. That is, the number of random numbers to be acquired based on the starting prize and what is to be determined for each random number can be arbitrarily set.

Further, in the above embodiment, the high base state is terminated when the variation display of the special symbol is executed 99 times, but the number of executions of the variation display of the special symbol as the end condition of the high base state (predetermined number). The maximum number of executions) can be changed arbitrarily.

Further, in the above embodiment, the upper limit number of stored figures is set to 4, but a configuration in which there is no drawing hold may be used. In this case, when the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is detected, if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not being executed and the auxiliary game is not being executed (the electric chew 22 is operating), the normal symbol random number is acquired. It may be configured.

11. Inventions Shown in the Above Embodiments The following inventions (inventions according to means A1 to A5, means B1 to means B4) are shown in the above embodiments. In the description of the invention described below, the corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiment and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the components of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1
A production control means (microcomputer 91 for production control) capable of controlling the production, and
A predetermined display unit (image display device 7) provided with a display screen (display screen 7a) and
Equipped with a movable body (thousand-point stick movable body 15K),
The movable body is composed of a plurality of partially movable bodies (thousand-point bar right movable body 15R, thousand-point bar left movable body 15L).
The effect control means
The plurality of partially movable bodies can be moved from a predetermined standby position (standby position shown in FIG. 6A) to a predetermined operating position (second operating position shown in FIG. 6C).
By moving the plurality of partially movable bodies from the standby position to the operating position, it is possible to form the movable body in a completed state.
A movable body image (see the thousand-point stick completed image TB, FIG. 77 (c)) that imitates the completed state of the movable body can be displayed on the display screen.
The movable body image is composed of a plurality of partially movable body images (first right partial image TK1, second left partial image TK2).
The movable body image is completed by displaying the plurality of partially movable body images on the display screen by the effect control means (see FIGS. 77 (b) and 77 (c)).
It is a game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, there are cases where a plurality of partially movable bodies are moved from a predetermined standby position to a predetermined operating position to form a movable body in a completed state, and cases where a plurality of partially movable bodies are formed. The image may be displayed on the display screen to complete a movable body image that imitates the completed state of the movable body. As a result, the fun of noticing that the movable body image displayed on the display screen is completed and the fun of noticing that the movable body is formed in the completed state will occur. It is possible to enhance the interest.

The invention according to means A2
In the gaming machine according to means A1
The method of appearing the partially movable body image until the movable body image is completed (see FIGS. 76 (e) to 76 (f) and 77 (a) to 77 (b)) and the movable body The method of appearance of the partially movable body (see FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (c)) is different from that of the partially movable body until it is formed in a completed state.
It is a game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the appearance method of the partially movable body image until the movable body image is completed and the appearance method of the partially movable body until the movable body is formed in the completed state are different. As a result, it becomes possible to provide the player with visually different enjoyment depending on whether the movable body image is completed on the display screen or the movable body is formed in the completed state. Can be increased.

The invention according to means A3
In the gaming machine described in means A2,
The method of appearing the partially movable body image is that the partially movable body image is linearly moved and displayed (FIGS. 76 (e) to 76 (f) and 77 (a) to 77. (B), see FIG. 77 (e)),
The method of appearing the partially movable body is that the partially movable body is moved in a curve (see FIGS. 6 (b) to 6 (c)).
It is a game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the partially movable body image is linearly moved until the movable body image is completed, but the partially movable body is curved until the movable body is formed in the completed state. It is possible to provide a difference that is easy for the player to recognize that it is movable. As a result, it becomes possible to visually entertain the case where the movable body image is completed on the display screen and the case where the movable body is formed in the completed state, and it is possible to enhance the game interest. ..

The invention according to means A4
In the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means 3.
The effect control means
When the plurality of partially movable body images are displayed on the display screen and the movable body image is completed, the movable body is completed by moving the plurality of partially movable bodies from the standby position to the operating position. (See FIGS. 76 (f), 77 (a) to 77 (d)).
It is a game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, a plurality of partially movable body images are displayed on the display screen, and the completed movable body image allows the user to understand that the movable body is formed in the completed state. The partially movable body is moved from a predetermined standby position to a predetermined operating position, and the fun of noticing the movable body formed in the completed state is strengthened, and it becomes possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

The invention according to means A5
In the gaming machine described in means A4,
The operating position is a position where the plurality of partially movable bodies are on the front side of the display screen (second operating position shown in FIG. 6C).
It is a game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when a plurality of partially movable body images are displayed on the display screen and the movable body image is completed, the plurality of partially movable bodies are moved from a predetermined standby position to a plurality of partially movable bodies. By being moved to a predetermined operating position on the front side of the display screen, the movable body is formed in a completed state. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a three-dimensional effect as if the movable body formed in the completed state from the completed movable body image pops out. Therefore, the fun of noticing the movable body formed in the completed state becomes stronger, and it becomes possible to enhance the game entertainment.

By the way, conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-1770113, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine is a big hit based on the entry into the starting port. A jackpot game is executed based on the result of the determination. For example, as described in Patent Document 1 below, many of them are provided with a movable effect movable body (movable body). However, in recent years, since there are many gaming machines capable of moving a movable body as described in Patent Document 1, it may be uninteresting to simply move the movable body. There was room for improvement in terms of increasing. In the above-mentioned invention A, with respect to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2005-177013, "a plurality of partially movable bodies can be moved from a predetermined standby position to a predetermined operating position, and a plurality of partially movable bodies can be designated. By moving the movable body from the standby position to a predetermined operation position, it is possible to form the movable body in a completed state, and it is possible to display a movable body image imitating the completed state of the movable body on the display screen. The movable body image is composed of a plurality of partially movable body images, and the movable body image is completed by displaying the plurality of partially movable body images on the display screen by the effect control means. " .. Thereby, the invention of the invention A can solve the problem of "it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game" (provide an action effect).

<Means B>
The invention according to means B1
An effect control means (microcomputer 91 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
An operation means (effect button 63) that can be operated by the player,
A movable body (thousand-point rod movable body 15K) that can move from a predetermined standby position (standby position shown in FIG. 6A) to a predetermined operating position (second operating position shown in FIG. 6C).
A predetermined display unit (image display device 7) and
With
The effect control means
An operation effect (thousand-point bar challenge, see FIGS. 75 to 77) using the operation means can be executed.
Based on the operation of the operation means in the operation effect, the display unit may succeed in displaying the movable body image (see the thousand-point bar completed image TB, FIG. 77 (c)) that imitates the movable body. Yes,
When the display of the movable body image is successful, the movable body is moved from the standby position to the operating position.
It is a game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is fun to notice that the display of the movable body image that imitates the movable body is successful on the display unit based on the operation of the operating means in the operation effect, and the display of the movable body image. Is successful, and it becomes fun to notice the movable body that is moved from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined operation position, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The invention according to means B2
In the gaming machine described in means B1
The movable body image is composed of a plurality of partially movable body images (first right partial image TK1, second left partial image TK2).
The effect control means
Based on the operation of the operation means in the operation effect, the partially movable body image can be displayed stepwise on the display unit (see FIGS. 76 and 77).
By displaying each of the plurality of partially movable body images at a predetermined stage (the final stage (two stages) of the thousand-point stick challenge, see FIG. 77 (b)), the display of the movable body image is successful (FIG. 77 (c)),
It is a game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the partially movable body image is displayed stepwise on the display unit based on the operation of the operating means in the operation effect, and each of the plurality of partially movable body images is in a predetermined stage. By displaying with, the display of the movable body image is successful. As a result, by paying attention to whether or not the display of the movable body image is successful during the execution of the operation effect, each of the plurality of partially movable body images is displayed at a predetermined stage, and the movable body image is displayed. It becomes possible to strengthen the enjoyment of noticing success, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The invention according to means B3
In the gaming machine described in means B2
The effect control means
By successfully displaying the image of the movable body, the movable body is moved from the standby position to the operation position in a series of operations (the standby position shown in FIG. 6A without being completely stopped ⇒ FIG. 6 The first operation position shown in (b) ⇒ the second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c) is moved in this order, and the fixed operation of the right movable body 15R of the 1000-point bar is shown in FIG. At the standby position shown in 6 (a) ⇒ the first operation position shown in FIG. 6 (b) ⇒ the constant operation of the left movable body 15L of the 1000-point bar that is moved in the order of the second operation position shown in FIG. 6 (c)). Move,
It is a game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the movable body image is displayed step by step, a plurality of partial movable body images are displayed, and when the display of the movable body image is successful, a predetermined operation is performed from a predetermined standby position. Since the movable body is moved to the position by a series of movements, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of noticing the moved body at an early stage, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The invention according to means B4
In the gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3
The effect control means
When the display of the movable body image is successful, the time is shorter than the time (about 7 seconds, see FIG. 74) from the start of the display of the partially movable body image to the successful display of the movable body image. The movable body is moved from the standby position to the operating position in (about 3 seconds, see FIG. 74).
It is a game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the movable body image is successfully displayed, the movable body image can be moved in a shorter time than the time required from the start of the display of the partially movable body image to the successful display of the movable body image. Since the body is moved from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined operation position, the movable body is moved at an early stage when the display of the movable body image is successful, and the movable body is moved from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined operation position. It becomes possible to notice the game quickly, and it becomes possible to enhance the game interest.

By the way, conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-1770113, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine is a big hit based on the entry into the starting port. A jackpot game is executed based on the result of the determination. For example, as described in Patent Document 1 below, many of them are provided with a movable effect movable body (movable body). However, in recent years, since there are many gaming machines capable of moving a movable body as described in Patent Document 1, it may be uninteresting to simply move the movable body. There was room for improvement in terms of increasing. The invention B described above relates to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-177013, "The effect control means enables the operation effect using the operation means to be executed, and the operation of the operation means in the operation effect can be performed. Based on this, the display unit may succeed in displaying the movable body image imitating the movable body, and when the movable body image is successfully displayed, the movable body is moved from a predetermined standby position to a predetermined operating position. It differs in that it "moves". Thereby, the invention of the invention B can solve the problem of "it is possible to enhance the interest in the game" (provide an action effect).

1 ... Pachinko game machine 3 ... Game area 7 ... Image display device 15R ... Thousand-point bar right movable body 15Rm ... Thousand-point bar right motor 15L ... Thousand-point bar left movable body 15Lm ... Thousand-point bar left motor 15K ... Thousand-point bar movable Body 20 ... 1st start port 21 ... 2nd start port 22 ... Electric chew 23 ... Movable member 35 ... 2nd big prize opening 36 ... 2nd big prize device 37 ... Opening and closing member 39 ... Specific area 80 ... Main control board 81 ... Game control microcomputer 90 ... Sub control board 91 ... Production control microcomputer TK1 ... First right partial image TK2 ... Second left partial image TB ... Thousand-point stick completed image

Claims (4)

An effect control means that can execute a predetermined effect,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A movable body that can move from a predetermined standby position to a predetermined operating position,
With a predetermined display
With
The effect control means
It is possible to execute an operation effect using the operation means.
Based on the operation of the operation means in the operation effect, the display unit may succeed in displaying the image of the movable body imitating the movable body.
When the display of the movable body image is successful, the movable body is moved from the standby position to the operating position.
A game machine characterized by that. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The movable body image is composed of a plurality of partially movable body images.
The effect control means
Based on the operation of the operation means in the operation effect, the partially movable body image can be displayed stepwise on the display unit.
By displaying each of the plurality of partially movable body images at a predetermined stage, the display of the movable body image is successful.
A game machine characterized by that. In the gaming machine according to claim 2.
The effect control means
By successfully displaying the image of the movable body, the movable body is moved from the standby position to the operating position in a series of operations.
A game machine characterized by that. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The effect control means
When the display of the movable body image is successful, the movable body is moved from the standby position in a time shorter than the time required from the start of the display of the partially movable body image to the successful display of the movable body image. Move to the operating position,
A game machine characterized by that.